Meridian America 21 инструкция обслуживания

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867

Идти на страницу of

Хорошее руководство по эксплуатации

Законодательство обязывает продавца передать покупателю, вместе с товаром, руководство по эксплуатации Meridian America 21. Отсутствие инструкции либо неправильная информация, переданная потребителю, составляют основание для рекламации в связи с несоответствием устройства с договором. В законодательстве допускается предоставлении руководства в другой, чем бумажная форме, что, в последнее время, часто используется, предоставляя графическую или электронную форму инструкции Meridian America 21 или обучающее видео для пользователей. Условием остается четкая и понятная форма.

Что такое руководство?

Слово происходит от латинского "instructio", тоесть привести в порядок. Следовательно в инструкции Meridian America 21 можно найти описание этапов поведения. Цель инструкции заключается в облегчении запуска, использования оборудования либо выполнения определенной деятельности. Инструкция является набором информации о предмете/услуге, подсказкой.

К сожалению немного пользователей находит время для чтения инструкций Meridian America 21, и хорошая инструкция позволяет не только узнать ряд дополнительных функций приобретенного устройства, но и позволяет избежать возникновения большинства поломок.

Из чего должно состоять идеальное руководство по эксплуатации?

Прежде всего в инструкции Meridian America 21 должна находится:
- информация относительно технических данных устройства Meridian America 21
- название производителя и год производства оборудования Meridian America 21
- правила обслуживания, настройки и ухода за оборудованием Meridian America 21
- знаки безопасности и сертификаты, подтверждающие соответствие стандартам

Почему мы не читаем инструкций?

Как правило из-за нехватки времени и уверенности в отдельных функциональностях приобретенных устройств. К сожалению само подсоединение и запуск Meridian America 21 это слишком мало. Инструкция заключает ряд отдельных указаний, касающихся функциональности, принципов безопасности, способов ухода (даже то, какие средства стоит использовать), возможных поломок Meridian America 21 и способов решения проблем, возникающих во время использования. И наконец то, в инструкции можно найти адресные данные сайта Meridian America, в случае отсутствия эффективности предлагаемых решений. Сейчас очень большой популярностью пользуются инструкции в форме интересных анимаций или видео материалов, которое лучше, чем брошюра воспринимаются пользователем. Такой вид инструкции позволяет пользователю просмотреть весь фильм, не пропуская спецификацию и сложные технические описания Meridian America 21, как это часто бывает в случае бумажной версии.

Почему стоит читать инструкции?

Прежде всего здесь мы найдем ответы касательно конструкции, возможностей устройства Meridian America 21, использования отдельных аксессуаров и ряд информации, позволяющей вполне использовать все функции и упрощения.

После удачной покупки оборудования/устройства стоит посвятить несколько минут для ознакомления с каждой частью инструкции Meridian America 21. Сейчас их старательно готовят или переводят, чтобы они были не только понятными для пользователя, но и чтобы выполняли свою основную информационно-поддерживающую функцию.

Содержание руководства

  • Страница 1

    - :;.- .‘, -: i ‘ I .’ SL-1 System options 21,51,61,71 System overview Standard[...]

  • Страница 2

    SL-1 System options 21,51,61,71 System overview Publication number: 553-3001-I 00 Document release: 1 .O Document status: Standard Date: January 29,199O 0 1990 Northern Telecom All right reserved System overview 553-3001-l 00 -. .:. .: .’[...]

  • Страница 3

    ii Revision history January 29,199O Standard, release 1.0 ‘: :.“‘I j System overview 553-3001-100[...]

  • Страница 4

    iii About this document This document describes the features and services, hardware and software architecture, and the family of products that comprise Meridian 1. References See the SL-I planning & engineering guide for - Master index (553-3001-000) - System overview (553-3001-100) - Installation planning (553-3001-120) - System engineering (5[...]

  • Страница 5

    iv About this document - General maintenance information (553-3001-500) - Fault clearing (553-3001-510) - Hardware replacement (553-3001-520) See the SL-1 XII software guide for an overview of software architecture, procedures for software installation and management, and a detailed description of all Xl 1 features and services. This information is[...]

  • Страница 6

    V Contents Meridian 1 1 The Meridian 1 commitment 2 Advanced features 5 System architecture 9 Meridian 1 modular architecture 9 Control 9 Switching 9 Peripherals 10 Software architecture 10 Firmware 11 Software 11 Office Data 11 Resident Programs 11 Non-Resident Programs 11 Hardware architecture 13 Common equipment 13 Network equipment 17 Periphera[...]

  • Страница 7

    vi Contents Remote Peripheral Equipment Carrier module (NT8D47) 52 InterGroup module (NT8D36AA) 54 Meridian Mail module (NT6D44) 55 Pedestal (NT8D27AB) 57 Top cap (NT7DOO) 57 Expansion kit (NT8D49) 57 Meridian 1 system options 60 Meridian 1 system option 21A 60 Meridian 1 system option 21 62 Meridian 1 system option 51 64 Meridian 1 System option 6[...]

  • Страница 8

    1 ,: .~.,. / :; :: ..‘ ! . . )I Meridian 1 Introduction Meridian 1 Communication Systems are a family of digital multiplex voice and data switching systems built upon a foundation of state of the art digital switching equipment and advanced software program control. Meridian 1 systems provide a wide range of sophisticated voice and data services [...]

  • Страница 9

    2 Meridian 1 Meridian Modular Telephones, a family of digital telephones that utilize standard twisted pair wiring and support a wide range of data communications options. Meridian 1 LANSTAR, a 2.56 Mbps local area network (LAN) for Macintosh II and IBM PC compatible computers. The Meridian 1 commitment Northern Telecom is committed to meet the nee[...]

  • Страница 10

    Meridian 1 3 System reliability Meridian 1 systems are designed and built to meet the highest standards for reliability, resulting in less downtime and increased system availability. In most systems, critical system elements are duplicated to guarantee system reliability. There are two identical Central Processing Unit (CPU) and memory circuits in [...]

  • Страница 11

    4 Meridian 1 systems. A System Monitor is installed in.the pedestal of each column. The System Monitor located in the column containing CPU0 acts as the master system monitor; monitors located in other columns act as slaves. The master polls the slaves and reports their status to the CPU. The master System Monitor is connected to the CPU by an RS23[...]

  • Страница 12

    Meridian 1 5 Ease of installation Every Meridian 1 system is shipped from the factory assembled and equipped to order. Installation effort is reduced to unpacking and positioning equipment, plugging in connectorized cables, ‘and adding customer-specific programming where required. Ease of expansion The modular packaging scheme employed by the Mer[...]

  • Страница 13

    6 Meridian 1 ESN The Electronic Switched Network (ESN) group of features supports voice and circuit-switched voiceband data telecommunications for multiple- location customer applications. ESN applications range from a single network node (combined PBX and network switching system) to a widely- dispersed network with up to 256 locations. For more i[...]

  • Страница 14

    Meridian 1 7 Meridian Mail voice messaging eliminates telephone tag and wasted calls by allowing detailed messages to be exchanged when parties are unavailable or busy. Guided by easy to follow prompts, a user can leave messages for others, retrieve messages, forward messages, and respond to messages with the touch of a single button. i . .: -. ‘[...]

  • Страница 15

    8 Meridian 1 h , r- . . . -* _ .’ System overview 553-3001-100 + . .[...]

  • Страница 16

    9 System architecture Meridian 1 modular architecture An important characteristic of Meridian 1 systems is a modular system architecture. It utilizes an efficient and flexible approach, employing modular construction in all areas of hardware and software, and state-of-the- art commercial and custom components. The result is a system which is highly[...]

  • Страница 17

    10 System architecture Peripherals Peripheral equipment provides the analog and digital interfaces for all peripheral devices, and performs analog to digital conversion of all input signals before switching is performed by the Network. Additionally, Peripheral equipment circuits provide the supervisory and transmission functions needed for trunks c[...]

  • Страница 18

    System architecture I I Firmware .:; These are fundamental programs consisting of hard-wired logic instructions :: j .,..“. _....~ ,‘;-T.>g ->yy I stored in Programmable Read Only Memory (PROM) which manipulate : ;-“‘: , . ..~ . . ,’ data in the central processor and control input/output operations, error : diagnostic and recovery r[...]

  • Страница 19

    12 System architecture receive output simultaneously. A terminal may be configured as an input only or output only device. Overlay programs provide the system interface for maintenance, service change, and traffic measurement. Each overlay program is independent and has its own specific set of commands and formats. Overlay programs may be run concu[...]

  • Страница 20

    System architecture 13 .: ‘:i ;--- .:.,:,, I ., _.’ ! a midnight routine or on a conditional basis (i. e. , data dump only occurs if a software service change has been made). It may also be invoked manually via the input/output (I/O) interface to the system. Software Audit This program monitors system operation and gives an indication of the ge[...]

  • Страница 21

    14 System architecture - The system memory stores all operating software programs and data unique to the particular Meridian 1 system, including switching sequences, features, class of service information, and quantity and types of terminals. - The Mass Storage Unit provides high speed loading of the operating programs and data into memory. - The D[...]

  • Страница 22

    System architecture 15 - asynchronous (handshake) bus operation - 16 file registers used to hold address and data for all operations - a sense (interrupt) input line to indicate that a particular device (tape, TTY, PE) requires action by the CPU - a trap facility which, when activated by an external signal, causes the CPU to immediately begin execu[...]

  • Страница 23

    16 System architecture Both types of Mass Storage Unit (MSU) are compatible with any Meridian 1 system running Software Generic Xl 1 Release 8 or later. The upgrade procedure involves replacing the Magnetic Tape Transport and associated tape interface with the desired Mass Storage Unit and equivalent Mass Storage Interface card (MSI) or Floppy Disk[...]

  • Страница 24

    I ‘. ! _‘:I . . . 2 _. . . . .- . . . . . . >. . ‘J : ::‘ ‘:<-i.., ‘,‘-.,--,: ‘: .A,, ! I : System architecture 17 Firmware - This portion of the memory is a non-volatile Read Only Memory (ROM) used for storage of all system fiiware. The ROM is programmed during manufacture and the instructions are permanent and indestructible[...]

  • Страница 25

    18 System architecture Meridian 1 systems provide two network circuit cards, the QPC414 Network Card which provides 2 loops per card, and the NT8DO4AA Superloop Network Card which provides 4 loops per card, grouped together in an entity called a Superloop. The Superloop permits all 120 ‘timeslots provided by the network card to be shared among th[...]

  • Страница 26

    System architecture 19 Network/Peripheral configuration The allocation of peripheral equipment to the network loop determines the traffic handling capability of the switching network. The lower the number of terminations, the higher the loop traffic capacity. The quantity and type of terminal assignments are allocated to optimize the traffic handli[...]

  • Страница 27

    20 System architecture Figure 2 Single and dual loop configurations QPc414 ENET Circuit Pack Network Loop Network Loop PE UEMIOR SHELF Two Network Loops Connected To One PE Shelf Containing Single, Double Or Quad Density PE Ctrcuit Packs PE UEMI OR SHELF $F[ One Network Loop Connected To Two -PE Shelves Containing Single Or Double Density PE Circui[...]

  • Страница 28

    System architecture 21 Superloop Network Configurations The Superloop Network Card combines four regular network loops to make 120 timeslots available to PE cards housed in Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Modules. This increased bandwiath and larger pool of timeslots increases the network traffic capacity by 25% for each 120 timeslot bundle. The N[...]

  • Страница 29

    22 System architecture Figure 3 NT8D37 lntellegent Peripheral Module segmentation segment 0 segment 1 segment2 -- Segment 3 Line Cards: NTBWPAA Digital Line Card 16 to 32 TNs NT8W3AA Analog Line Card 16 MS NTBDOSAA Message Waiting Line Card 16 TNs TN density: Per segment 16 iu 128 TNs Per IPE module 64 to 512 TNs Trunk Cards: NTBD14AA Universal Tru[...]

  • Страница 30

    System architecture 23 ,.‘i‘... :::.- -:., ,* 1 segment per Superloop In this configuration, 1 segment is assigned to 1 Superloop (see Figure 4). In cases where the segment is populated with NT8DO2AA Digital Line Cards with all 16 voice and all 16 data TNs provisioned, the.1 segment per superloop configumtion will provide a virtual non-blockin[...]

  • Страница 31

    24 System architecture 2 segments per Superloop In this configuration, 2 segments are assigned to 1 Superloop (see Figure 5). In cases where the segment is populated with NT8DO2AA Digital Line Cards with no data TNs enabled, NT8DO3 Analog Line Cards, NT8Do9AA Message Waiting Line Cards, or NT8D14AA or NT8D15AA Tnmk Cards, the 2 segment per superloo[...]

  • Страница 32

    System architecture 25 4 segments per Superloop In this configuration, 4 segments are assigned to 1 Superloop (see Figure 6). In cases where the segment is populated with NT8DO2AA Digital Line Cards, NT8DO3 Analog Line Cards, NT8DO!JAA Message Waiting Line Cards, or NT8D14AA or NT8DlSAA Trunk Cards, the 4 segment per superloop configuration will pr[...]

  • Страница 33

    26 System architecture 8 segments per SUperlOOp In this configuration, 8 segments are assigned to 1 Superloop (see Figure 7). ln cases where the segment is populated with NT9IO2AA Digit& Line Cards, NT8DO3 Analog Line Cards, NT8DO!JAA Message Waiting Line Cards, or NT8D14AA or NT8DlSAA Trunk Cards, the 8 segment per superloop configuration will[...]

  • Страница 34

    System architecture 27 ..- _ .:.y;- _T. I ,, ..:+ I,. . . . . _:, : -:: : ..T ., Figure 7 8 segments per Superloop configuration System overview 553-3001-100[...]

  • Страница 35

    28 System architecture 1 segment per Superloop segmenis per Superloop In this configuration, 1 segment is assigned to 1 Superloop and an additional 3 segments are assigned to another Superloop (see Figure 8). This configuration provides a virtual non blocking environment for the single segment served by the fiist Superloop and a medium concentratio[...]

  • Страница 36

    System architecture 29 2 segments per Superloop/ segments per Superloop In this configuration, 2 segments are assigned to 1 Superloop and an additional 6 segments are assigned to another Superloop (see Figure 9). This configuration provides a virtual non blocking environment for the two segments served by the first Superloop (or a very low concentr[...]

  • Страница 37

    30 System architecture Figure 9 2 segments per Superloop/ segments per Superloop configuration System overview 553-3001-100 c[...]

  • Страница 38

    System architecture 31 Peripheral Equipment Peripheral Equipment consists of peripheral controller cards which provide the timing and control sequences for peripheral circuits, analog and digital line and trunk cards, which provide the interfaces for terminal devices, and circuit cards which provide Digital Trunk Interface (DTI),and Primary Rate Ac[...]

  • Страница 39

    32 System architecture with minimum time delay and low phase distort&, a requirement for the proper transmission of data signals. Remote Peripheral Equipment (RPE) In a local operating environment, the peripheral equipment may be housed up to 50 feet from the common equipment. The RPE feature extends this range to approximately 70 miles between[...]

  • Страница 40

    System architecture 33 - A new System Monitor has been designed to provide enhanced power, cooling, and general system monitoring capabilities. This new System Monitor interfaces to the CPU via a Serial Data Interface card, for intelligent error and status reporting. - - Maintenance messages that indicate the location of power faults and status dow[...]

  • Страница 41

    34 System architecture The choice of which powering scheme to use is determined primarily by reserve power requirements and preferences, and by existing power equipment at the installation site. Figure 10 AC power architecture I Battery Bank I w UPS DC RkXXifkI --- AC inp AC POWERED SYSTEM (with reserve power ) , ‘ fgg Required i -- 0 Optional 1 [...]

  • Страница 42

    System architecture 35 Figure 11 DC power architecture DC POWERED SYSTEM (with reserve power) System overview 553-3001-l 00 .d :[...]

  • Страница 43

    36 System architecture System overview 553-3001-l 00 z.. : :[...]

  • Страница 44

    37 Product description .:; ,_ .y’.. 1 ::: -:‘ .‘. : Universal Equipment Modules The Meridian 1 System is comprised of Universal Equipment Modules (UEMs), each containing everything needed (card cage assembly, power supply, I/O cabling, etc) to support a specific system function. These UEMs are assembled up to four high on a pedestal, to for[...]

  • Страница 45

    38 Product description - Common/Peripheral Equipment module (NT8Dll) - Intelligent Peripheral Equipment module (NT8D37) . - Peripheral Equipment module (NT8D13) - - Remote Peripheral Equipment Carrier module (NT8D47) - InterGroup module (NT8D36AA) - Meridian Mail module (NT6D44) Figure 12 Universal Equipment Modules Universal Equipment Top-P Univ[...]

  • Страница 46

    Product description 39 CPU module (NT8D34) The NT8D34 CPU module houses the CPU and Memory cards used to provide system control and storage of data and programs, for the Meridian 1 system option 71. Each NT8D34 CPU module houses one CPU; two are required for the Meridian 1 system option 71. For configuration flexibility the NT8D34 CPU module is ava[...]

  • Страница 47

    40 Product description Figure 13 NT8D34 CPU module -typical configuration I - ! SL-1 CE Module ~CPU/Mem Common Equipment System overview 553-3001-100 c[...]

  • Страница 48

    Product description 41 CPU/Network module -(NT6D39) The NT6D39 CPU/Network module houses the CPU and Memory circuit cards used to provide system control and storage of data and programs for Meridian 1 system option 51 and 61. Each NT6D39 module houses one CPU and up to 16 network loops required for each Meridian 1 system option 51 and 61. For confi[...]

  • Страница 49

    42 Product description Figure 14 NT8D39 CPU/Network module -typical configuration ;L-1 CE Module 1 Net I CPUAkm System overview 553-3001-l 00[...]

  • Страница 50

    Product description 43 Network module (NT8D35) The NT8D35 Network module houses the circuit cards which are used to provide the digital multiplexed network loops of the switch.mg system, along with the control and signalling cards rquired to interface the switching function with the CPU. The NTSD35 Network Module is used in Meridian 1 system option[...]

  • Страница 51

    [...]

  • Страница 52

    Product description 45 Common/Peripheral Equipment modute (NT8Dli) The NT8Dll module houses the common, network and peripheral equipment circuit cards for Meridian 1 system options 21A and 21. The NT8Dll CE/PE module is available intwo versions, AC or DC power. These power supplies provide the voltages to operate the circuit cards located in the mo[...]

  • Страница 53

    46 Product description The NT8Dll CE/PE Mod&e contains 20 card slots which support the following: - slot 1 : FDI - slot 2 : CPU - slot 3: Memory - slots 4-8: Network cards - slot 9: Conference/Tone and Digit Switch card (N’lXD17AA) - slot 10: Network/DTR card (NT8D18AA) (Always configured as SuperLoop 28) - slots O-9: Intelligent Peripheral E[...]

  • Страница 54

    .-.; :,::, : ,. ,:,_ ,:,:,+ ,.. :( .![...]

  • Страница 55

    48 Product description Intelligent Peripheral Equipment module (NT8D37) The Intelligent Peripheral Equipment module uses the new Peripheral Equipment cards only and may be used with system options 21A,.21,51, 61,7 1. With an upgrade assembly the Intelligent Peripheral Equipment modules may be used with all existing systems. The NT8D37 Intelligent P[...]

  • Страница 56

    Product description 49 Figure 17 NT8D37 Intelligent PE module-typical configuration 0 1 IPE @ LJ PE Pwr Sup II . System overview 553-3001-100 . .[...]

  • Страница 57

    50 Product description Peripheral Equipment module (NT8D13) The Peripheral Equipment module uses the PE circuit cards currently housed in PE shelves for the Meridian SL-1 systems. It provides the interface to the system for trunks and stations. The NT8D13 module may only be connected to an ENET (QPC414) circuit card and maybe used in system options[...]

  • Страница 58

    $ F I I ? Analog or Dgital Line Card or Trunk Card * I Analog or Dgilial Line Card cr Trunk Card It-l 5 Analog or Dgital Line Card or Trunk Card II 211 WC659 Peripheral Buffer Card -II Iill Analog or Dgillal Line Card or TrunkCard B I $ ltlt 3 Analog or Dgtial Line Card or Trunk Card Analog or Dgflial Line Card or Trunk Card Analog or Dgltial Line [...]

  • Страница 59

    52 Product description Remote Peripheral Equipment Carrier module (NT8D47) The NT8D47AA/DC RPE Carrier module is used to extend the Network to PE interconnection distance between local and remote sites. It, 1 accommodates two network loops. The number of modules required per system depends on the number of stations in the remote site. For configura[...]

  • Страница 60

    Product description 53 Figure 19 NT8D47 RPE Carrier module -typical configuration System overview 553-3001-100 %.[...]

  • Страница 61

    54 Product description InterGroup module (NT8D36AA) The InterGroup module provides a path for the switching of traflic between the network groups in system option 71. Faceplate cables from Segmented Bus Extender (SBE), System Clock (SCG) and InterGroup Switch (IGS) circuit cards are connected to the InterGroup module. These faceplate cables are acc[...]

  • Страница 62

    Product description 55 I./ ;:. ..:,=-, ._ ./ I.. ., j! II --.--x..:~:; -. . . . . . Meridian Mail module (NT6D44) The NT6D44 Meridian Mail module houses the circuit cards currently used by the Meridian Mail Option for Meridian SL-1 systems: The NT6D4.4 Meridian Mail module may only be connected to an ENET (QPC4 14) circuit card and may be used in M[...]

  • Страница 63

    56 Product description Figure 21 Meridian Mail module -typical configuration MERIDIAN MAIL MODULE NT6D44 . . Circuit breakers I V smdr / for Power corrputer &h Availabiliiy N.h!oJLe ’ RS-232 ,;;;ym Bus Controller PIDCWSU .setice sup+3 Common Equipment wle Power St&ply Hard Disk Modules: NT4G5QAG NT4RO6M NT4RolAA (multiple (Maidan 1 NT4[...]

  • Страница 64

    Product description 57 Pedestal (NT8D27AB) The NT8D27AB pedestal is a base unit made of die-cast construction and houses the power distribution unit, system monitor, blower unit, and fan unit connector. One pedestal is required per equipment column. The pedestal is approximately 31.5 inches wide by 25.50 inches deep by 10 inches high and weighs 30 [...]

  • Страница 65

    58 Product description Figure 22 Multi-column system equipped with NTBD49 Expansion kits NT8D49 Expansion Kits System overview 553-3001-l 00[...]

  • Страница 66

    Product description 59 NT8D49 Expansion Kit Spacer System overview 553-3001-l 00[...]

  • Страница 67

    60 Product description Meridian 1 system options Several system options are available. The use of the Universal Equipment Modules allows for seamless growth from one option to another by adding or replacing Universal Equipment Modules or card cages. The options are selected depending upon the application, line size, and other customer requirements:[...]

  • Страница 68

    Product description 61 Table 1 System option 21A specifications Power Typical Number of Ports Maximum Number of Ports Maximum Number of Modules AC Input Voltage Number of CPUs Number of Network Loops l Cooling Memory Data Storage Software Generic Hardware Features AC only 160 320 1 208 V ac 1 7 SuperLoops or 12 ENET Loops plus two service loops (Co[...]

  • Страница 69

    62 Product description Meridian 1 system option 21 The Meridian 1 system option 21 package includes the CEjPE base hardware, 1 Network/DTR card, 1 Conf/TDS card, 1 Floppy Disk Unit (FDU), 2 SD1 paddle boards. The Pedestal and Top Cap assemblies must be added. Figure 25 illustrates a typical configuration with the shaded area showing the base packag[...]

  • Страница 70

    .;. _, ,‘) 2;: ‘,i, ,’ .” . ..’ ,y -. :, ,-,z ;.. ‘:. 3 ,:: : .., ._,! .) Product description 63 Table 2 System option 21 spcifications Power Maximum Number of Ports Input Voltage Number of CPUs Number of Network Loops Cooling Memory Storage Media Software Generic Hardware Features AC or DC 800 208Vacor-48Vdc 1 7 SuperLoops or 12 ENET L[...]

  • Страница 71

    64 Product description Meridian 1 system option 51 The Meridian 1 system option 51 package includes 1 CPU/Network module, 1 Conference and TDS card, 1 SuperLoop NetworJc card, 2 SD1 paddle boards, 1 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment module, 1 Pedestal assembly and 1 Top Cap. The FDU or MDU assembly must be added. Figure 26 shows a typical system con[...]

  • Страница 72

    :, ..-:.- ‘:;. .; -‘.,. : ‘: ! ‘L :, Product description 65 Table 3 System option 51 specifications Power Maximum Number of Ports Input Voltage Number of CPUs Number of Network Loops Cooling Memory Storage Media Software Generic Hardware Features AC or DC 1000 208 V ac or -48 V dc- 1 16 Fan Impellers in pedestal 768K Floppy Disk Unit or Mul[...]

  • Страница 73

    66 Product description Meridian 1 System option-61 The Meridian 1 System option 61 package includes 2 CPU/Network Modules, 2 Conference and TDS cards, 1 SuperLoop Network card, 2 SD1 paddle boards, 1 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment module, 1 Pedestal assembly and 1 Top Cap. The FDU or MDU assembly must be.added. Figure 27 shows a typical system co[...]

  • Страница 74

    Product description 67 Table 4 _I System option 61 specifications ‘,j .<..:. 1 :;.‘. j ;,:.:;, 2; : 1 ;._, Power AC or DC . . . (, Maximum Number of Ports 2000 Input Voltage 1208Vacor-48Vdc I Number of CPUs 2 Number of Network Loops 32 Cooling 1 Fan Impellers in pedestal I Memory Storage Media 768K Floppy Disk Unit or Multi Disk Unit Softwar[...]

  • Страница 75

    68 Product description Meridian 1 system option 71 The Meridian 1 system option 71 package includes 2 CPU Modules, 1 InterGroup module, 1 Network Group assembly, 2 Conference and TDS cards, 1 SuperLoop Network card, 2 SD1 cards, 2.Intelligent Peripheml Equipment Modules, 2 Pedestal assemblies and 2 Top Caps. The FDU or MDU assembly must be added. F[...]

  • Страница 76

    Product description 69 Table 5 System option 71 specifications Power Distribution Unit and Contains ‘: :; ..- . . . : :.: “C :::‘:.:‘) , _. . -. A, ~ .,.E : .:::.:: ::. System overview 553-3001-100[...]

  • Страница 77

    70 Product description System overview 553-3001-l 00 . .[...]

  • Страница 78

    71 List of terms ACD Automatic Call Distribution. ADM Add-On Data Module. AIM Asynchronous Interface Module. ALU Arithmetic Logic Unit. Architecture The interrelationship between the parts of a system. The framework of a system. ASIM Analog Asynchronous/Synchronous Interface Module. A process which models information in the form of a continuously v[...]

  • Страница 79

    72 List of terms Analog signal ANI Ampere Backplane Battery back-up BISDN BTU Capacity Cards Card Cage A signal that varies in a continuous manner such as voice or music. An analog signal may be contrasted with a digital signal which represents only discrete states. The signal put out by a data set has both analog .zuid discrete characteristics. Au[...]

  • Страница 80

    List of terms 73 CAS Centralized Attendant Service. CASM Centralized Attendant Service, Main. CASR Centralized Attendant Service, Remote. cc Clock Controller. CDR Call Detail Recording. CE Common Equipment. Central Office (CO) The site where the telephone companies terminate customer lines and locate the switching equipment which interconnects thos[...]

  • Страница 81

    74 List of terms co Central Office. CPU Central Processing Unit. Common equipment (CE) A hardware subsystem that houses one or more Central Processing Units (CPUs), memory circuits, mass storage devices, and service circuits. Configuration A group of machines (hardware) which are interconnected and are programmed to operate as a system. Data Termin[...]

  • Страница 82

    .i ,..:‘.(.. ..( .;:,: ,._. .‘,’ _’ List of terms 75 Digital signal A signal made up of discrete, non-continuous pulses whose information is contained in theirduration, periods, and/or amplitude. Directory number DSL DTE DTI DTR EIA EMI ESN Failure rate Firmware FM The four-digit number or extension given to a Meridian SL-1 telephone set. A[...]

  • Страница 83

    76 List of terms Frame A distributing frame. The structure on which all distribution and trunk cables into a central office are terminated (attached). Frequency Division Multiplexing (FDM) Combining two or more information channels into a single transmission channel by assigning each information channel an exclusive frequency band within the transm[...]

  • Страница 84

    List of terms 77 MDF Main Distributing Frame. See “Frame” above. ‘I ‘I. ::>;.. :::> MF .>, . ,..:. ., -“’ ..a -1 u :;.:: t -.; > Multi-Frequency; A method of sending numerical address digits between telephone company switching centers coded as two or more frequencies between 300 and 3400 Hertz. MFS Multi-Frequency Signaling.[...]

  • Страница 85

    78 List of terms ODAS Office data Office Data Administration System; provides a method of retrieving administrative information stored in Meridian SL-1 memory. Office data represents system configuration data, peripheral equipment data, and transient data (temporary) used for call processing. PBX Private Branch Exchange. PCM Pulse Code Modulation, [...]

  • Страница 86

    List of terms 79 ISDN Primary Rate Interface. Private Branch Exchange PBX; A small telephone switching center enabling a customer’s telephone stations to connect to the public switched network. Private Exchange A private (manual) telephone exchange that provides private telephone service to an organization that does not allow calls to be transmit[...]

  • Страница 87

    80 List of terms RFI RH ROM The disruption of radio signal reception caused by any source which generates radio waves at the same frequency and the same path as the desired wave. Relative Humidity. Read Only Memory: Storage system or computer memory that is “burned into” the microprocessor chip and can only be read, not written to or modified. [...]

  • Страница 88

    List of terms 81 Spare stock size The quantity of spares for a given stock item. Sparing interval The period of time that stocks of replaceable SL-1 items should last without being replenished. Stock confidence level The allowed probability of not being out of stock when the sparing interval of one year is greater than 99. 9 percent. System hardwar[...]

  • Страница 89

    82 List of terms Trunk A single circuit between two points, both of which are switching centers or individual distribution points. Teletype machine. 2DFi Two-Way Tie, Dial Repeating. Turnaround time The number of days it takes to replace a failed item and to return a useable item to stock. UEM Universal Equipment Module; a modular, self-contained h[...]

  • Страница 90

    [...]

  • Страница 91

    SL-1 System options 21,51,61,71 System overview Copyright 0 1990 Northern T&corn All rights reserved. information subject to change without notice. Release 1 .O Standard January 29, 1990 Printed in U.S.A. nit northern tolocom[...]

  • Страница 92

    SL-1 System options 21,51,6.1,71 Installation planning Standard : ; .,.. -... . ‘. .::. :-/ :,“.: i;.: :’ : .,I’[...]

  • Страница 93

    -3 : :.. ““..[...]

  • Страница 94

    ,i i.’ d : ! S-1 System options 21,51,61,71 Installation planning Publication number: 553-3001-l 20 Document release: 1 .O Document status: Standard Date: January 29,199O 0 1990 Northern Telecom All rights reserved. installation planning 553-3001-120[...]

  • Страница 95

    ii Revision history January 29,199O Standard, release 1.0 Installation planning 553-3001-120 . . ,[...]

  • Страница 96

    Preface iii Notice The Canadian Department of Communications label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational and safety requirements. The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction. Before installing this equ[...]

  • Страница 97

    iv Preface J Users should ensure for their own protectjon that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas. CAUTION Proper electrical ground connections Users should not attempt to mak[...]

  • Страница 98

    About this document This section of the Planning and engineering guide deals with planning the environment that the SL-1 (Option 21,51,61, and 71) system will inhabit, including equipment location, commercial power requirements (AC and DC), grounding, and cabling requirements. Most of the considerations for site planning and installation are common[...]

  • Страница 99

    vi About this document - Installation procedures for telephone sets and attendant consoles (553-2201-215) - Extended systems installation (553-3001-250) - Disk drive upgrade procedures (553-3001-251) - General maintenance information (553-3001-500) - Fat.& clearing (553-3001-510) - Hardware replacement (553-3001-520) See the SL-I XII software g[...]

  • Страница 100

    About this document vii Related documentatiori The following documents contain information that may be of value during the site planning and preparation process. - 1987. “Maintenance, Testing and Replacement of Large Storage Batteries.” IEEE, Vol. 450: all pages. - - 1987. “Design and Installation of Large Lead Storage Batteries.” IEEE, Vol[...]

  • Страница 101

    viii About this document - Grounded Conductor (i.e., Neutral) (NEC Articles: 250-26,250-50,250-51,250-53 and, 250-61) (CEC lo-206,10-900-908,10-500,10-502,10-518) - Equipment Grounding Conductor (NEC Articles: 250-50,250-5 1, 250-53,250-57,250-91,250-32,250-92 and; 250-95) (CEC 10-900-908,10-500,10-502,10-510,10-804,10-300,10-302) - Main Bonding Ju[...]

  • Страница 102

    ix Contents Planning activities 1 The installation outline 1 The Milestone chart 4 Researching the requirements General requirements The equipment room environment Environmental factors Temperature and humidity Static electrfcity Vibration Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Dust Lighting Earthquake bracing Structural Air conditioning requirements S[...]

  • Страница 103

    x Contents AC service panel - Dedicated versus shared power Auxiliary power requirements Isolated service receptacles Non-isolated service receptacles Power Fail Transfer Unit (PFTU) powering Cabling Cable types Twisted-pair telephone cables 25-Pair MDF cables Twisted-pair shielded cables Interface (l/O) cables UEM cable routing Network to PE cabli[...]

  • Страница 104

    Contents xi Ceilings - 51 Walls 5-l Between floors 51 Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) 52 Termination points 52 Distribution frames 52 Preparing for delivery Considerations Equipment handling precautions 55 55 57 :. -I-- _ _‘. .c..:. __ : ;-f ._,, ::..- :; :’ ,.‘“..,..“, ., -‘. _, Preparing for installation Work orders Equipment room[...]

  • Страница 105

    xii Contents Installation planning 553-3001-120 .d ,[...]

  • Страница 106

    1 Planning activities The installation outline Since installations differ from site to site, no single overall schedule of predelivery activity will apply in all cases. In each instance, prepare a detailed plan when the site has been selected and the equipment ordered. Use Table 1, “Outline for installation planning, ” as a guide for making a d[...]

  • Страница 107

    2 Planning activities _’ Table 1 Outline for installation planning Items Research Procedures Read the requirements identified in this document. Establish equipment environment, air conditioning requirements, floor loading requirements, and other requirements listed in this section. Select a site Check space, location, power and grounding, and del[...]

  • Страница 108

    Planning activities 3 . ._ . . . . i . Table 2 Site planning activities Activities Wform detailed site survey. Determine if building wire needs /erification and gather preliminary customer data. Hold contract review meeting. Prepare project plarl. Hold customer meeting to discuss project plan and division of responsibilities. Hold Construction Phas[...]

  • Страница 109

    4 Planning activities - The Milestone chart Planning and monitoring site preparation activites is easier when you use a Milestone chart. The Milestone chart is a site planning schedule. It shows the sequence of activities necessary to complete a job and will be different with each site. Depending on the complexity of the site, the chart may be more[...]

  • Страница 110

    Planning activities 5 Table 3 Milestone chart I Select the site. Plan the equipment room layout. Plan power and grounding, reserve and/or battery requirements. Plan cable requirements. Plan and start renovations to implement equipment room layout. Continue site construction and renovation tasks. Install power, grounding, reserve power, air conditio[...]

  • Страница 111

    6 Planning activities Installation planning 553-3001-120[...]

  • Страница 112

    7 Researching the requirements Knowing the requirements for system installation saves valuable time and energy when the time comes for system delivery. The first step in planning a site, then, is researching those requirements. The purpose of this section is to define the general requirements necessary to plan and develop the site before system ins[...]

  • Страница 113

    8 Researching the requirements The equipment room environment The environment that the SL-1 operates in and that spare parts are stored in can influence system performance and reliability. When establishing the equipment environment, control over these factors is necessary: - temperature and humidity - static electricity - vibration - electromagnet[...]

  • Страница 114

    Researching the requirements 9 Table 4 shows the SC-1 operating en?rironment Table 4 SL-1 operating environment Equipment rerminals (sets) 3L-1 Gccmmended 15-30” C (59-86” F) ?H 20 to 55%, Ion-condensing Temperature and humidity considerations Absolute O-50’ C (32-122O F), RH 20-80%, non-condensing Absolute lo-45O C (50-l 13O F) RH 20 to 80%,[...]

  • Страница 115

    10 Researching the requirements In addition to proper operating temperaturq and humidity considerations, the SL-1 should be stored and/or transported under the following specifications: Table 5 SL-1 storage/transportation environment Equipment Terminals (sets) SL-1 Recommended 1 5-30° C (59-86” F) RH 20 to 80%, non-condensing Temperature and hum[...]

  • Страница 116

    Researching the requirements 11 Environmental factors Temperature and humidity High temperatures tend to increase the rate of deterioration of most materials. Temperature fluctuations can cause temporary or permanent changes to equipment which can affect the grade of service. Low humidity conditions can increase the build up of static electricity, [...]

  • Страница 117

    12 Researching the requirements Vibration in the office environment should be limited to a frequency range of 0.5200 Hz and a G-force magnitude of 0.1 G (according to the Bellcore Network Equipment Building Systems Generic Equipment Requirements specification TR-EOP-000063). Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) - Sources of EM1 located close to the e[...]

  • Страница 118

    Researching the requirements 13 Lighting - Lighting illumination of 50-75 footcandles measured 30 inches (76 cm) above the equipment room floor is recommended. Lighting must not be powered from the equipment room power panel. For large system installations, provisions for emergency lighting in the equipment room should be considered. Direct sunligh[...]

  • Страница 119

    14 Researching the requirements These guidelines should beused along with the following tables when estimating air conditioning requirements. Exact requirements should be determined by a qualified air conditioning engineer. El CAUTION I Proper air conditioning standkds . Digital systems require constant power regardless of the level of system activ[...]

  • Страница 120

    Researching the requirements 15 Table 6 continued - SL-1 system heat dissipation Module Heat dissipation Watts BTU/hr NT8D35 Network 300 1020 NTSD13 Peripheral Equipment 300 1020 NT8D37 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment NTsD47 Remote Peripheral Equipment NT8D36 InterGroup 425 1450 300 1020 0 0 Note: Thermal load (BTUIhr) = Total power dissipation (W[...]

  • Страница 121

    16 Researching the requirements Sk-l system power options - The SL-1 system is available in both AC and DC versions where DC power is connected to the commercial power panel by means of extended power rectifiers or power plants, and the AC power is connected directly to the commercial power panel. If an Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) is used in[...]

  • Страница 122

    Researching the requirements 17 DC-powered SL-1 systems DC-powered SL-1 systems, which use direct current UEM power converters, operate at a nominal -48V dc. URMs in a column are fed DC power from the pedestal Power Distribution Unit (PDU). The pedestal is powered from an external DC power plant The NT7D12AA rectifier rack contains up to three NT6D[...]

  • Страница 123

    18 Researching the requirements AC-powered SL-1 systems- Power converters in SL-1 systems, which use alternating current, operate at a nominal 208/240 V ac. A typical system operating from 208 V using four UEMs will draw 15-25 Amps depending on the configuration. These are fed from a central point in the pedestal; access to these connections is pro[...]

  • Страница 124

    2 .f.. ‘>:. : r...:.:--:3 ‘:.‘...-.I: Researching the requirements 19 Input power specifications The following tables provide input system power specifications as required for AC power: Table 8 Input power specifications Input Minimum Nominal Maximum Voltage (VAC) at pedestal 180 2081240 250 Frequency (Hz) 47 50160 63 Transient tolerance ([...]

  • Страница 125

    20 Researching the requirements Commercial power conditi6ning If the quality of the commercial power source continuously meets the SL-1 system requirements listed in this section, a power conditioner is not required, however, where the commercial power is of poor quality and cannot consistently meet the SL-1 system requirements, a powerconditioner [...]

  • Страница 126

    Researching the requirements 21 Failure to follow the~grounding proceduresmay result in an installation that is: - unsafe for personnel working on or using the equipment - not protected horn lightning or power transients . - - subject to service interruptions - subject to degraded system performance Commercial power and grounding requirements The c[...]

  • Страница 127

    22 Researching the requirements Isolated ground topology A dedicated Isolated Ground (IG) bus bar is required with this method. This IG bus is located in the AC panel and serves as the ground window. It is used for all AC (green wire) grounds as well as logic returns. It also accommodates a conductor which references to the (+) battery bus in a DC [...]

  • Страница 128

    Researching the requirements 23 - In a steel-framed building, the SL-1 ground interface must have a connecting reference to the building steel on the same floor on which it resides (or within one floor). Note: Northern Telecom does not recommend the use of building steel as part of the SL-1 ground system. - Proper wire sizing of the System Ground R[...]

  • Страница 129

    24 Researching the requirements Figure 1 Dedicated transformer in isolated ground system Transformer Conduit Meridian SL-1 Service Panel 3nRv l%A I Isolated J Ground ( Receptacle I I I I I I I I isolated lb Ground Bus l-Hl+rTl-r Note 6 Cadwelded or 2 ALCU Clamps Logic Return Conductor bgic Return ~~~~l~~ing Bus Building Ground , s‘::s ._, . . . [...]

  • Страница 130

    Researching the requirements 25 Notes for Figure 1: - Ground conductor should be the same size as the largest conductor run between the transformer and the AC panel. Transformer (dedicated for SL-1 and Telco Interface Equipment) shall provide a secondary voltage of single phase 120/240 or three phase 208Y/12OV and must have a system ground conducto[...]

  • Страница 131

    26 Researching the requirements Figure 2 Dedicated transformer in non-isolated ground system Transformer Conduit h Aeridian SL-1 Service Panel 208V I Note 5 Note 4' -Ad 30A ’ ; ’ I / =A 1 ; II ’ 15A Isolated e Neutral Bus 0 Note 7 (Receptacle) - Logic Return Equalizing n--d ___L__ 6‘ 1, ’ WJIKWCi”’ Note 8 F Building Ground 563-3[...]

  • Страница 132

    Researching the requirements 27 Notes for Figure 2: - Ground conductor should be the same size as the largest conductor run between the transformer and the AC panel. Transformer (dedicated for SL-1 and Telco Interface Equipment) shall provide a secondary voltage of single phase 120/240 or three phase 208Y/12OV and must have a system ground conducto[...]

  • Страница 133

    28 Researching the requirements Figure 3 Shared AC distribution in an isolated ground system SL-1 Related Wiring Contained In Rigid Conduit or EMT el 1 .-.I r &Note Neutral bus Isolated from power panel t To LRE Note 6 5539017 Installation planning 553-3001-120 .[...]

  • Страница 134

    ‘! Researching the requirements 29 Notes for Figure 3: - An isolated ground receptacle must be used for systems with isolated ground. An isloated ground receptacle with individual hot neutral and ground conductors must be used for systems with isolated ground. An alternate earthing electrode, if required, must be installed in a minimum of 6 ft. ([...]

  • Страница 135

    30 Researching the requirements Figure 4 Shared AC distribution in a non-isolated ground system SL-1 Related Wiring Contained I I In Rigid Conduit or EMT Note 3 -b bi!EE!l, , LRE To LRE Note 6 5633016 installation planning 553-3001-120 . . : :[...]

  • Страница 136

    Researching the requirements 31 Notes for Figure 4: - An isolated ground receptacle must be used for systems with isolated ground. An isloated ground receptacle with individual hot neutral and ground conductors must be used for systems with isolated ground. An alternate earthing electrode, if required, must be installed in a minimum of 6 ft. (1.8m)[...]

  • Страница 137

    32 Researching the requirements Auxiliary power requirements Integrated terminals, printers, modems, and data units require local power. Power for devices located in the equipment room must meet the following criteria: - wired and fused independently of all other receptacles - tagged at the power panel to prevent unauthorized interruption of power [...]

  • Страница 138

    ; (.’ :. : ;y:. : : :’ ! ,, , . ,, Researching the requirements 33 CabHng This section identifies the various cabling used in the SL-1 system and provides some guidelines for cabling. Equipment placement in relation to cable lengths should be considered and planned for. Depending on your system and future expansion (of PE modules, for example),[...]

  • Страница 139

    34 Researching the requirements Interface (l/O) cables - I/O cables are typically 25conductor flat-ribbon or round cables interfaced through RS-232-C connectors. These cables are used to connect data units to printers, host computers, and modems. UEM cable routing Cables may be routed internally in the UEM horizontally in front and at the rear of t[...]

  • Страница 140

    Researching the requirements 35 Cable access requirerients The customer is responsible for supplying all access for station, feeder, and riser cabling including where necessary: - conduit - floor boring - boring all major walls on a particular floor - access into hung ceilings, including removal and replacement of ceiling tiles Fire protection and [...]

  • Страница 141

    36 Researching the requirements conditioning systems should be designed to inhibitthe spread of fire, heat, and smoke from one part of a building to another. Smoke detectors should also be installed. Services such as steam, water, and power should be checked regu.Iarly, and pipes should be inspected for excess condensation,.leaks, and corrosion. If[...]

  • Страница 142

    Researching the requirements 37 Security precautibns and safeguards Existing practices of building security should be extended and improved to provide adequate protection for the equipment. Safeguards such as tamperproof keylock door controls and electrically taped glass doors and windows can be tied into an alarm system. A monitoring unit using cl[...]

  • Страница 143

    38 Researching the requirements Installation planning 553-3001-120 .a : ‘. . . .[...]

  • Страница 144

    Planning the site 39 Planning the site is an important element to consider when planning the installation of an SL-1. It impacts the installation costs, operation and maintenance and can have an overall effect on system performance. Selecting a site Sites should be selected and evaluated according to the followingcriteria and the detailed informati[...]

  • Страница 145

    40 Planning the site Developing the site - After selecting a site, the following items must be considered during site development: - Space and equipment layout requirements - Equipment rmrn accessories - Detailed floor plans and loading requirements - Building cable plans - System wire routing - Cable termination points The equipment room Space and[...]

  • Страница 146

    .: Planning the site 41 Note: Sample floor plans may .vary from your own depending on your system needs and the size/arrangement of your equipment room. Follow the engineering guidelines as specified in System engineering (553-3001-151). Secondary storage Provide space for the storage of disks, printer paper, printouts, and daily reports within the[...]

  • Страница 147

    42 Planning the site - Storage cabinets for spare parts, backup tapes or disks, and printer Paper The floor plan Since the space requirements and the overall layout of the equipment room can have an effect on the installation, operation, and maintenance of a system, a detailed floor plan should be drawn up for each site. ...>.;,. % The floor pla[...]

  • Страница 148

    Planning the site 43 The weight and dimgnsions of the SL-1 system should also be considered: Table 9 Weight and dimensions of an SL-1 system Assembly Weight Weight SiZS SiZe Size item empty full width dipth height Pedestal 40 ibs. 70 ibs. 32 in. 26 in. 10 in. Top Cap 15 ibs. 15 ibs. 32 in. 22 in. 4 in. UEM 50 ibs. 130 tbs. 32 in. 22 in. 17 in. 1 Mo[...]

  • Страница 149

    44 Planning the site Figures 5,6, and 7 show sotie sample equipment room floor plans. These may vary from your own. Figure 5 SL-1 Option 21 equipment room floor plan I 36 in. (915 mm) t 25 in. (65 mm) f IX cross connect terminal ~qg~~w , / 1 additional , * equipment , ‘(such as reserve f 1 power supply or f auxiliarv / Note: This sample floor pla[...]

  • Страница 150

    Planning the site 45 Figure 6 SL-1 Options 51 and 61 equipment room floor plan ‘5533020 Note: This sample floor plan may vary from your own depending on your system needs and the size/arrangement of your equipment room. . .‘.-‘,-~~.-‘, ,’ ,Y Installation planning 553-3001-l 20[...]

  • Страница 151

    46 Planning the site Figure 7 SL-1 Option 71 equipment room floor plan 553-3021 Note: This sample floor plan may vary from your own depending on your system needs and the size/arrangement of your equipment room. SL-1 Option 71 may also expand to a second row of Peripheral Equipment modules. Installation planning 553-3001-120[...]

  • Страница 152

    Planning the site 47 Floor loading estimates Floor loading estimates should be obtained in order to plan for proper stacking of modules. (Floor loading is the weight of the system divided by the occupied floor arena Point loading is the local pressure exerted by the system feet on the floor.) Table 10 shows the floor loading estimates for stacking [...]

  • Страница 153

    48 Planning the site - The building cable plan The building cable plan should be divided into zones. The zones are typically the termination point of conduits throughout the office. Each zone on the building cable plan should be identified with a letter or number, and a block of numbers should be assigned to each zone. Be sure to leave room for exp[...]

  • Страница 154

    :: ..,r . . ~. :: .:. .:.::::: Planning the site 49 - A random sampling of in-place wiring’is taken during a site survey to ensure that it meets specifications for high-speed lines. - When telephone cable is run in conduit, that conduit must not be used for any other wiring. The location of conduits and floor ducts, for example, should be known. [...]

  • Страница 155

    50 Planning the site Figure 8 Sample building cable plan ZONE I ZONE ZONE ZONE I . Each Zone Approximately 6CG600 sq. ft. I I I ----- P ---m-B 1 -B-B-- -- l ----- 6 z h 8 Installation planning 5!53-3001-120 L. ~[...]

  • Страница 156

    Planning the site 51 Wire routing The routing of all wires for the SL-1 must be specified as part of the plan. To plan wire routing, establish the start and end point of each cable relative to the location of telephones in the office. Remember that each modular jack (8-pin or 6-pin, for example) must be within 8 feet. (2.4 m) of the telephones. At [...]

  • Страница 157

    52 Planning the site Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Data degradation may occur if wires travel near strong sources of electomagnetic interference. See “The equipment room environment” in this document for common sources of interference. Termination points Once the routes for the wires have been determined, the termination points for the the[...]

  • Страница 158

    Planning the site 53 Table 11 Sample cable record CABLE RECORD I iiiii I I -. I I I sl( OR Installation planning 553-3001-120[...]

  • Страница 159

    54 Planning the site Installation planning 553-3001-120[...]

  • Страница 160

    55 Preparing for delivery The route the equipment must take from the receiving area to the installation area must be studied in advance. The route should be measured to ensure problem free delivery of the equipment. The following factors must be considered: Considerations - size and security of the loading and storage areas - capacity and availabil[...]

  • Страница 161

    56 Preparing for delivery In addition, here are some questions to consider when preparing for delivery: - Has a request been made for equipment delivery? - Is a list of all equipment ordered available on site? - Are transportation arrangements to premises completed? - Is assistance available to prepare the switchroom? From unloading area to equipme[...]

  • Страница 162

    1:; . ., ‘I -‘.‘-+ :, ‘; _ _ _ _ . . _ . .,^. - ._. ,.._ ,’ Preparing for delivery 57 Equipment handling precautions The following general guidelines should be followed when handling SL-1 equipment: - Circuit packs, disks, and tapes are very sensitive to s.tatic discharge; all static electricity should be discharged-from the body prior to[...]

  • Страница 163

    58 Preparing for delivery Installation planning 553-3001-120 -. ‘. : . . : _ ‘.[...]

  • Страница 164

    59 Preparing for installation The following items should be provided at the time of installation: - Work orders - Equipment room floor plan - Building cable plan - Installation, Administration and Maintenance Manuals, and User Guides - Installation plan - Delivery equipment (pallet jack, for instance) - Unloading/unpackaging instructions Work order[...]

  • Страница 165

    60 Preparing for installation Equipment room floor plans The equipment room floor plans should show the location of: - each SL-1 module, power module, and future expansion module (UEM) - a reserve power unit (if applicable) - maintenance and administration terminal and printer (if equipped) and printer locations (if applicable) - the cross-connect [...]

  • Страница 166

    Preparing for installation 61 Cabling plan - The cabling plan should show: - cable routing and designation information - location of peripheral devices and pr$rters (if applicable) - directory numbers (DNs) assigned to each peripheral device and Office Data Administration System (ODAS) designators (if the software package is equipped) - features av[...]

  • Страница 167

    62 Preparing for installation The installation plan - The installation plan may consist of a floor plan, a cabling plan, and an ITS (Installation and Test Sequence) chart, The chart shows typical installation tasks, the sequence of the tasks, and task start and duration information. Manuals The following manuals should be at hand when installing an[...]

  • Страница 168

    Preparing for installation 63 Equipment room inspections An equipment room inspection ensures that the following conditions are met: - physical and environmental requirements met - system power and utility outlets installed and tested - lighting installed and working - AC power distribution installed according to Northern Telecom specifications - e[...]

  • Страница 169

    64 Preparing for installation General inspections General inspections ensure that the following conditions are met - building cross-connect terminals are provided - conduits or floor ducts to terminal locations are‘installed (including service fittings) - access conduit for raceway is in place - sufficient terminal blocks are provided - sufficien[...]

  • Страница 170

    Preparing for installation 65 An Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) isused for reserve power in AC- powered systems. It includes basic and supporting equipment, including rectifier/charger, inverter, controls and instrumentation. A battery bank is a separate item but may be required together with the UPS. The following items should be inspected and[...]

  • Страница 171

    SL-1 System options 21,51,61,71 Installation planning Copyright Q 1990 Northern Telecom All rights reserved. Information subject to change without notice. Release 1 .O Standard January 29,199O Printed in U.S.A. mt northern talactlm[...]

  • Страница 172

    SL-1 System options 21,51,61,71 System engineering Standard -.. .,.. ,j ;; : : r-y :- ..,/ northern talaeam c Meridian I : :[...]

  • Страница 173

    . . .:_[...]

  • Страница 174

    SL-1 System options 21,51,61,71 System engineering Publication number: 553-3001-151 Document Status: Standard Document release: 1 .O Date: January 29,199O . . ,. . . . .:.:. ,;, ,..._ _, ,~ ._ , .: 0 1990 Northern Telecom All rights reserved. System engineering[...]

  • Страница 175

    ii Revision history January 29,199O Standard release 1 .O System engineering 553-3001-151[...]

  • Страница 176

    iii About this document General information The following document has been updated to include new naming conventions and system engineering guidelines for the SL-1 System. Acronyms and abbreviations for the new names are identified in the text using parentheses. This section provides the necessary information to: - determine the equipment requirem[...]

  • Страница 177

    iv About this document References See the SL-I planning & engineering guide for - Master index (553-3001-000) - System overview (553-3001-100) - - Installation planning (553-3001-120) - System engineering (553-3001-151) - Power engineering (553-3001-152) - Sparesplanning (553-3001-153) - Equipment identification and ordering (553-3001-W) See th[...]

  • Страница 178

    V Contents System organization and capacities Option 21 Options 51 and 61 Option 71 Universal Equipment Modules CUPE UEM (NT8Dl lAC/DC) Description of CUPE UEM (NT8Dll AC/DC) CPU/Network UEM (NTGD39WDC) Description of CPU/Network UEM (NTGD39AAIDC) CPU UEM (NT8D34AAIDC) Description of CPU UEM (NT8D34AA/DC) Network UEM (NT8D35AA/DC) Description of Ne[...]

  • Страница 179

    vi Contents Definitions - 27 General rules 27 UEM and column designations 27 Configurations 28 Peripherals 29 Traffic distribution 30 Traffic definitions 31 Equipment utilization 33 Network loop traffic 33 Partitioning 33 Network loop assigning 34 PE card distribution 35 IPE card slot assigning 36 Card slot priority 36 Class of service priority 36 [...]

  • Страница 180

    Contents vii ,_ i _1: : ::. .: ;: : ., ,-: :/ Step 3 Trunks required Example 53 53 53 Step 4 54 Line, trunk, and console load 54 Line load 54 Trunk load 54 Console load 54 Step 5 55 DTR requirements 55 Model 1 56 Model 2 56 Model 3 56 Model 4 56 Detailed calculation: method 1 57 Detailed calculation: method 2 59 Step 6 60 Total system load 60 Step [...]

  • Страница 181

    viii Contents Step 11 68 TDWonference loop 68 Step 12 69 Memory 69 Step 13 70 Equipment summary 70 Feature calculations 71 Calculations with Authorization Code 71 Calculations with Centralized Attendant Service (CAS) 72 Calculations with Charge Account for CDR 73 Calculations with Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 74 Example . . 74 Calculations wi[...]

  • Страница 182

    l-l System organization and capacities The SL-1 System is basically organized into different kinds of systems and can support from 32 to 10,000 analog or digital lines, depending on traffic and feature requirements. System configurations are determined by customer requirements and the physical limitations of the equipment. Both AC and DC power opti[...]

  • Страница 183

    1-2 System organization Figure l-l Option 21 with multiple UEMs 553-3022 System engineering 553-3001-151[...]

  • Страница 184

    System organization 1-3 Figure 1-2 Option 51 with half network group 553-3023 System engineering 553-3001-l 51 .4[...]

  • Страница 185

    1-4 System organization Figure 1-3 Option 61 with full network group 553-3024 System engineering 553-3001-151[...]

  • Страница 186

    System organization l-5 Option 71 - Option 71 is a multiple network group machine with redundant CPU and serves from 2,000 to 10,000 lines. See Figure 14. Figure 1-4 Option 71 with multiple network group - t Main UEM Columr 553-3025 Note: This document has been updated to include new naming conventions. Acronyms and abbreviations for the new names [...]

  • Страница 187

    1-6 System organization Universal Equipment Modtiles This document has been updated to include new naming conventions. Acronyms and abbreviations for the new names are identified in the text using parentheses. Each configuration of the SL-1 consists of a nuniir of Univ&sal Equipment Modules (UEMs). Each module can be identified by its function.[...]

  • Страница 188

    System organization 1-7 CUPE UEM (NT8h 1 AC/DC) Table l-2 Identification of CUPE UEM (NTBDll AC/DC) Unit Number required per UEM Common/Peripheral Equipment 1 Power Supply (CE/PE Pwr Sup) (AC-NT7D14AA) (DC-NT7D04AA) Floppy Disk Interface card (FDI) 1 (QPC742) CPU card (QPC687) 1 Memory/Peripheral Signalling 1 card (NT8D19AA) NetworkDTR card (NT8D18[...]

  • Страница 189

    1-8 System organization Description of CE/PE UEM (NT8Dl lAC/DC) Slots 1,2, and 3 are reserved for the following circuit cards: : - Floppy Disk Interface (FDI) (QPC742) - Central Processing Unit (CPU) (QPC687) - Memory/Peripheral Signalling Card (NT8D19AA) Slots 4 through 9 in the Network area can be used by the following cards: - Superloop Network [...]

  • Страница 190

    System organization 1-9 Slot 10, Net/Corn, must be occupied by the Network/DTR card (NTSDlSAA) which combines the functions of a Network and Peripheral Equipment controller and a Digitone receiver. The card provides ten loops for ten PE cards. Peripheral Equipment slots 0 through 9 can be occupied by any of the following cards: - Digital Line Card [...]

  • Страница 191

    l-1 0 System organization CPU/Network UEM (NTGD39AAIDC)’ Table 1-3 Identification of CPU/Network UEM (NTGD39AAIDC) Unit Number-required per UEM Common Equipment Power 1 Supply (CE Pwr Sup) (AC- NT8D29AB) (DC-NTGD41AB) Network cards (QPC414) 18 Superloop Network cards ~6 (NT8D04AA) Clock Controller/Serial Data 1 Interface (SDI) (QPC471 /QPC139) Pe[...]

  • Страница 192

    System organization l-11 Description of CPWNetwork UEM (NTGD39AAiDC) Slots 1 through 8 are reserved for the following cards: - Network cards (QPC4 14 or NT8DO4AA) The rest of the slots contain the following cards: - slot 9 : Clock Controller or Serial Data Interface (SDI) - slot 10: Peripheral Signaling - slot 11: Three Port Extender (3PE) - slot 1[...]

  • Страница 193

    l-l 2 System organization CPU UEM (NT8D34AAIDC) Table l-4 Identification of Single CPU UEM Unit Number- required per UEM Common Equipment Power 1 Supply (CE Pwr Sup) (AC- NT8D29AB) (DGNTGD41AB) CPU function card (QPC579) 1 CPU interface card (QPC580) 1 Changeover and Memory 1 Arbitrator (WA) card (QPC581) Memory cards (QPC583) 2 Mass Storage Interf[...]

  • Страница 194

    System organization 1-13 Description of CPU UEM (NT8434AAIDC) Slots l-2 are reserved for the following cards: - Memory cards (QPC581) The rest of the slots contain the following c-ards: - slot 3: CMA - slot 4: CPU interface - slot 5: CPU function - slot 6: SD1 - slot 7: MS1 - slots 8-12: Segmented Bus Extender (SBE) - slot 13: available slot 14: Cl[...]

  • Страница 195

    l-1 4 System organization Network UEM (NT8D%AA/DC) Table l-5 Identification of Network UEM hit Number_ required per UEM :ommon Equipment Power 1 upply (CE Pwr Sup) (AC- IT8D29AB) (DCNTGD41 AB) ‘hree-Port Extender (3PE) 1 slPC4.41) Iter-Group Switch (IGS) cards 2 ZPC412) ‘eripheral Signalling card 1 3PC43) #erial Data Interface (SDI) card 1 zlPC[...]

  • Страница 196

    System organization l-15 Description of Network UEM (NT8D35AAIDC) The slot assignment of cards is as follows: - slots 1: Three Port Extender (3PE) - slots 2-3: Intergroup Switch (IGS) (for Option 71 only), PRI/DTI, or SD1 - slot 4: Peripheral signaling - slots 5- 12: Network cards - slot 13: PRI/DTI or SD1 - slot 14: PRI/DTI - slot 15: not used Not[...]

  • Страница 197

    l-1 6 System organization Intelligent Peripheral &ipment UEM (IPE) (NT8D37AAlDC) Table l-6 Identification of IPE UEM Unit Number required per UEM Peripheral Equipment Power Supply (PE Pwr Sup) (AC- NT8DOGAA) (DC-NTGD41AB) AC Ringing Generator (NT8D21AA) (required only when analog cards are present) Controller-2 (Cont-2) (NT8DOl AD) Card or Cont[...]

  • Страница 198

    System organization 1-17 Description of IPE‘UEM (NT8D37AA/DC) The NT8D37 IPE backplane (NT8D3701) contains 16 card slots. Slots O-15 are for line cards. Slot 16 is for miscellaneous. The Controller Card is situated near the center of the module, between slot 7 and slot 8. If one or two superloops are to be served, use Cont-3 If three or four supe[...]

  • Страница 199

    l-1 8 System organization Table l-7 Port-to-line card orientation for IPE (NT8D37hUDC) line cards Line card Ports served Digital Line Card 16 Digital (NT8D02AA) Analog Line Card 16 Analog (NTBD08AA) Analog Message Waiting 16 Analog with Message Line Card (NT8DOSAA) Waiting features Universal Trunk Card ZG 8 trunks with any (NT8D14AA) combination of[...]

  • Страница 200

    System organization l-19 PE UEM (NT8D13&DC) Table l-8 Identification of PE UEM (NTBD13AAIDC) Unit Number required . -per UEM Peripheral Equipment Power Supply (PE Pwr Sup) (AC-NTBDOGAA) (DC-NTGD41 AB) See note. 1 AC Ringing Generator (Rng Gen) (NT8D21 AA) (required only when analog cards are present.) Dual Loop Peripheral Equipment Buffer (QPC6[...]

  • Страница 201

    l-20 System organization RPE UEM (NTBD47AtiDC) Table l-9 identification of RPE UEM Unit Number Number per UEM perJtPE loop Common/Peripheral 1 Equipment Power Supply (CPE Pwr Sup) (NT7D14AA) 1.5Mbps Converter cards 2 1 (QPC62) 2Mbp.s Converter cards 2 1 (QPC66) Carrier Interface cards 2 1 (QPC99) Local Carrier Buffer 2 1 (QPC63) Remote Peripheral B[...]

  • Страница 202

    System organization 1-21 Description of RPE UEM The slot assignment of cards is as follows: - slot 1: PRI/DTI (optional) - slot 2: 1.5 Mb converter - slot 3: 2 Mb converter - slot 4: carrier interface - slot 5: remote peripheral - slot 6: local carrier buffer - slot 7: carrier interface - slot 8: 2 Mb converter - slot 9: 1.5 Mb converter - slot 10:[...]

  • Страница 203

    1-22 System organization InterGroup UEM (NT8D36AA) Figure l-5 InterGroup UEM 0 III-I I IGSO Ial IGSl IGS 0 4(m)& (m)Jqo J,3 (m> Jlacm) 4 0 J15(-) J*‘,(w) 2 0 Jll 512 II-- 0 J17c~3~ c”““) 0 I I I I I I 553-3026 Description of InterGroup UEM The NT8D36AA InterGroup UEM provides a path for the switching of --- traffic between the networ[...]

  • Страница 204

    System organization 1-23 .’ System capacities - Network terminating capacity The Superloop Network Card (NT8DO4AA) has four network loops grouped as one superloop. One superloop can serve up to, two Intelligent Peripheral Equipment UEMs (IPE) (NT8D37AA/DC). Network traffic capacity Each superloop is capable of carrying 3500 CCS (or 875 CCS/Ioop) [...]

  • Страница 205

    1-24 System organization Configuration capacities The maximum configuration capacities of the SL-1 Options 51,61, and 71 are: - 100 customers - 30 steps in a hunting group - 8191 speed call lists per system - 4095 ringing number pickup groups per customer - 5 12 trunk routes per customer - 254 members per trunk route - 4 listed directory numbers pe[...]

  • Страница 206

    2-1 Definitions General rules Apply the following rules for system engineering when arranging various Universal Equipment Modules (UEMs) within an SL- 1. Note: This document has been updated to include new naming conventions. Acronyms and abbreviations for the new names are identified in the text using parentheses. UEM and column designations Colum[...]

  • Страница 207

    2-2 Definitions through the I/O panels or EM1 filters. In addition, all vertical routing of the internal signal cables should be done on the right side of a column. The InterGroup UEM should be located at the top of a column and adjacent to the CE UEMs. Peripheral Equipment (PE or IPE) UEMs may be located away from CE and CPU UEMs by a maximum netw[...]

  • Страница 208

    Definitions 2-3 Peripherals - One superloop (the equivalent of four regular loops) should serve two, four, six, or eight segments. A segment is one-fourth of the Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (IPE)(NT8D37AA/DC) shelf containing four slots. A superloop can serve from one segment to two IPE UEMs in increments of one segment, depending on the ratio[...]

  • Страница 209

    2-4 Definitions Traffic distribution - The traffic distribution in the SL- 1 is illustrated in Figure 2-1. This illustration is valid when considering individual customer or system traffic. Figure 2-1 Traffic distribution over the SL-1 Loop traffic / Line traffic Trunk iraff ic 7Y originating terminating incoming outgoing SL-1 System homing ” ter[...]

  • Страница 210

    Definitions 2-5 - Line=IT+OO+IOT+IOO where: Line = Line traffic in CCS IT = Incoming Terminating traffic in CCS. 00 = Originating Outgoing traffic in CCS IOT = Irma-Office Terminating traffic in CCS 100 = Inn-a-Office Originating traffic in CCS - R=(IOT+IOO)/Line where: R = Irma-Office Ratio - Loop=Line+IT+OO where: Loop = loop traffic in CCS =Line[...]

  • Страница 211

    2-6 Definitions Equipment utilization Equipment is provided and maintained throughout the SL-1 location life at an 85% utilization level. Network loop traffic The recommended traffic level for a Network superloop is: - 3500 CCS without Digitone-using apparatus - 2975 CCS with Digitone-using apparatus The traffic level per netwcrk loops depends on w[...]

  • Страница 212

    Definitions 2-7 Network loop assigning When assigning the loop number in systems equipped with two Network UEMs, the load should be distributed evenly across both UEMs. Loops should be assigned in the order shown in Table 2- 1. Record the loops used . in Worksheet L provided at the end of this document. The total number of Peripheral Equipment UEMs[...]

  • Страница 213

    2-8 Definitions PE card distribution Using Worksheet M (provided at the end of this document), determine the total number of each type of PE cards (500, SLl, TRK, DTR, etc.) per PE UEM. Using Worksheets N and 0 (also provided at the end of this document), determine the number of Multiple Appearance Groups (MAG) assigned to each loop. (Also refer to[...]

  • Страница 214

    Definitions 2-9 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (.IPE) card slot assigning Card slot priority Input messages from card slots 1 and 0 in each IPE module (card slot 0 in each EPE shelf) are directed to a high priority input buffer.. The input messages from the remaining slots on each -lPE module are directed to a low priority input buffer. The syste[...]

  • Страница 215

    2-10 Definitions Attendant consoles - Attendant consoles should never be assigned to a high priority card slot. Too many high priority messages from attendant consoles assigned to these card slots can result in delays in output messages to attendant consoles, sets and trunks. Attendant consoles should always be assigned to card slots 2 through 10. [...]

  • Страница 216

    Definitions 2-11 Assigning cards - Procedure 2-1 Order for assigning cards 1 Assign cards requiring a card slot 1 assignment (high priority slot). 2 Assign cards for high-usage trunks, such as CO trunks. 3 Assign cards for low-usage trunks, such as paging and dictation. 4 Assign cards for attendant consoles. Note: For the.PE UEM (NT8D13AA/DC), card[...]

  • Страница 217

    2-12 Definitions Terminal number assigning Once the cards are assigned to the PE UEMs, the individual units on each card can be assigned. Use Worksheet Q (at the end of this document) to record the Terminal Number (TN) assignments. TN 0000 cannot be used on superloop 0. Therefore, use loop 0 for Enhanced Network or . Conference/IDS Card to avoid wa[...]

  • Страница 218

    Definitions 2-13 Equipment relief - When additional equipment is installed, assignments should be concentrated into the new loop or shelves until the first threshold study. At that time, the loop profile would be updated and a new loading plan developed. At any time when a loop exceeds 500 CCS (based on 85% traffic level), that loop should be suspe[...]

  • Страница 219

    . .[...]

  • Страница 220

    Provisioning guidelines Procedure 3-1 Provisioning guidelines Note: To determine the equipment requirements, follow the provisioning guidelines in the order shown below. Worksheets and Tables are all provided at the end of this document. Step 1 Define and forecast growth. Step 2 Estimate ccs per terminal. Step 3 Calculate number of trunks required.[...]

  • Страница 221

    3-2 Provisioning guidelines Step 10 Calculate number of PE UEMs re&rexl. Step 11 Provision TDS/Conference loops. Step 12 Calculate memory requirements. Step 13 Assign the equipment/prepare equipment sutimary. Note: The provisioning methods described in this document are based on a non-partitioned system using the figures provided. The figures a[...]

  • Страница 222

    Provisioning guidelines 3-3 Step 1: Define and forecast growth The first step in provisioning an initial SL-1 is to forecast the growth of the system at the 2-year and 5-year interval in terms of telephone stations. The number of telephones required when the system is placed in service (cutover) is determined by the customer. If the customer is una[...]

  • Страница 223

    3-4 Provisioning guidelines To determine the number of telephones required from cutover through a 5- year interval, the number of employees required at cutover 1,2,3,4, and 5 years is multiplied by the ratio of telephones to employee. <!:a - 500 (employees) x 0.55 (ratio) = 275 telephones required at cutover ~;~~~. - 525 (employees) x 0.55 (rati[...]

  • Страница 224

    Provisioning guidelines 3-5 .: Step 2: :::j Estimate ccs per terminal .i; / I 7 L . . . . . . ,y ..- :.I .._( ;:.,,.* -j “-.-. CCS per terminal The station and trunk CCS per terminal (CCS/r) for an initial installation of an SL- 1 can be estimated using any one of the following methods. - Comparative method - Manual calculation - Default method C[...]

  • Страница 225

    3-6 Provisioning guidelines Table 3-l Example of station, trunk, and intra cc& averaging Line size Line CCSrr Trunk CCST lntra CCST Customer A Customer B 200 250 4.35 4.75 2.6 3.0 1.7 1.75 Customer C 150- 3.5 2.0 1.5 Total Average 600. 200 12.6 4.2 7.6 2.5 4.95 1.65 If only the trunk CCS/r is available, then multiply the trunk CCS/T by 0.5 to d[...]

  • Страница 226

    Provisioning guidelines 3-7 Table 3-2 Example of cc&t averaging when drily trunk c&t are known Trunk Type No. of Grede of Load in No. of CCSIT TN&S sBrvim CCS T@ltlS DID 16 P.01 -294 n 1.2 co 14 P.02 267 234 1.14 TIE 07 P.05 116 215 0.54 Paging 02 10 ccsnrunk 20 207 0.09 Out WATS 04 30 ccwlrunk 120 216 0.54 FX 02 30 ccstnrnk 60 216 d.27[...]

  • Страница 227

    3-8 Provisioning guidelines Manual calculation of c&t Normally, the customer can estimate the number of trunks required at cutover and specify the grade of service to be maintained at the 2-year and 5-year period. (If not, the comparative method can be used). The number of trunks can be read from the appropriate trunk&g table to select the [...]

  • Страница 228

    j ,..._ ..-_ . ,. I j ..: -::. . . C> ,, :‘. : I.- .., x. .: j Provisioning guidelines 3-9 This method is used for each trunk group inIhe system, with the exception of small special services trunk groups (Tie Trunks, Wats, FX). Normally, the customer will tolerate a lesser grade of service on these trunk groups. Table 3-3 has been developed wh[...]

  • Страница 229

    3-10 Provisioning guidelines Default method Studies have been conducted which estimate the average line CCS/r to never be greater than 5.5 in 90 percent of all businesses. If attempts to calculate the CCS/r using the comparative method or the manual calculation have not been successful, the default-of 5.5 line CCS/r can be used. The network line us[...]

  • Страница 230

    Provisioning guidelines 3-l 1 -: . . 1 ~.‘.YY . . _ -1 I .’ Table 3-4 Defautt Method and Manual Calculations analysis Default Method Manual Calculations Difference Cutover 3025 2863CCS 162 CCS 2 Years 3344 3162 CCS 182 CCS 5 Year5 3872 3657 CCS 215 CCS System engineering 553-3001-l 51 -. ..:[...]

  • Страница 231

    3-12 Provisioning guidelines Step 3: Calculate number of trunks required Trunks required The values obtained through any of the three previous methods should now be entered on Worksheet A (provided at the end of this document). Add your calculations to the worksheet. Once the trunk CCS/T is known, and a grade of service has been specified by the cu[...]

  • Страница 232

    Provisioning guidelines 3-l 3 Step 4: Calculate line, trunk, and console load Line, trunk, and console load _ Once the quantity of trunks required has been estimated, enter the quantities on Worksheet A (in Step 1) for the cutover, 2-year and 5-year interval. This calculation must be performed for each trunk group to be equipped. The total trunk CC[...]

  • Страница 233

    3-14 ‘hovisioning guidelines Step 5: Calculate DTR requirements Once station and trunk requirements have been determined for the complete system, the Digitone Receiver (DTR) requirements can be calculated. DTR are shared by all customers in the system and should be distributed equally over all the network loops. Tables 6-3 through 6-6 (at the end[...]

  • Страница 234

    Provisioning guidelines 3-15 .! ~ . . . . -. .., ..- . .I .:- .: ., ‘:::‘.i:;+ : . . , From the appropriate table (See Table.6-3 to.Table 6-6 at the end of this document) determine the number of DTR required and the DTR load for cutover, two-year, and five-year interval. Record this information on Worksheet B (located at the end of this documen[...]

  • Страница 235

    3-16 Provisioning guidelines Detailed calculation: method 1 This method can be used when there are no incoming Digitone DID trunks and the following is assumed: - Receiver traffic is assumed to be inflated by 30% to cover unsuccessful dialing attempts. - Call holding times used in Irma-office and Outgoing Call calculations can be assumed to be 135 [...]

  • Страница 236

    Provisioning guidelines 3-17 3 Calculate average holding time:. Average holding time = f6.2 x Intra) + (14.1 x outeoing) Intra calls + outgoing calls 4 Refer to Table 6-7 or Table 6-8 (at theend of this document) and use answers from (2) and (3) above to determine the number of receivers required. Detailed calculation: method 2 This method can be u[...]

  • Страница 237

    3-18 Provisioning guidelines Step 6: Calculate total system load Total the line, trunk, console, and Digitone receiver load for each customer to arrive at a total load figure for each customer for the cutover, 2-year, and 5-year interval. Enter this figure on Worksheets B and C (at the end of this document). Step 7: Calculate number of superloops r[...]

  • Страница 238

    Provisioning guidelines 3-19 Non-blocking configura‘tion with Superloop Network For non-blocking applications (or non-blocking part of the system), provide one superloop per 120 Terminal Numbers (INS). Each line or trunk is one TN except that an integrated voice and data line is two TNs (assuming dam port is configured). Blocking configuration wi[...]

  • Страница 239

    3-20 Provisioning guidelines Table 3-5 Number of DTI cards required when DTl/PRI traffic is known DTIPRI traffic (CCS) Number of DTI cards 1 - 507 1 - 508 - 1201 2 1202 - 1935 3 1936 - 2689 4 2690 - 3456 5 3457 - 4231 6 4232 - 5006 7 5007 - 5781 8 over 5781 provide 8+ one DTI for each 774 ccs in excess of 5781 ccs. Note: In a Network module, if two[...]

  • Страница 240

    Provisioning guidelines 3-21 Step 8: Calculate number of Network groups required Compute the number of Network groups based on the total. number of loops required (excluding conference and tone loops). The following equation should be used: (Also refer to Table 3-6.) Total number of loops = 4 x no. of Superloop Network Cards + 2 x no. of Enhanced N[...]

  • Страница 241

    3-22 Provisioning guidelines Step 9: Calculate number of PE cards required Enter the number of Digitone receivers required (from Worksheet B) at the cutover, 2-year, and 5-year interval on Worksheet D. Use a separate worksheet for the cutover, 2-year, and 5-year intervals. Using the information on Worksheet A, enter the number of M2xxx TNs, M3xxx T[...]

  • Страница 242

    Provisioning guidelines 3-23 Step 11: Provision YEWConference loops Tone and Digit Switch (TDS) and Conference (CONF) loops are provisioned according to the two-year figure for the number of network loops required. All systems should be equipped with a minimum of two TDS and two CONF loops. Refer to Table 6- 10 (at the end of this document) to dete[...]

  • Страница 243

    _:-[...]

  • Страница 244

    4-1 Feature calculations Calculations with Authorization Code With authorization code, the receiver holding times are changed from 6.2 seconds to 19.6 seconds for intra-office calls, and from 14.1 seconds to 27.5 seconds for outgoing calls. Use these figures in (2) and (3) of Detailed calculation Method 1,‘and (2) of Detailed calculation Method 2[...]

  • Страница 245

    4-2 Feature calculations Calculations with Centralized Attendaht Service (CAS) This method is used to determine the DTR requirements for the main location of a system equipped with the CAS option. The following is assumed: - All attendant calls presented through Release~Link Trunks’ (RLT) from a remote PBX require Digitone Receivers. - The averag[...]

  • Страница 246

    Feature calculations 4-3 Calculations with Charge Account for CDR The receiver holding time for outgoing calls changes from 14.1 seconds to 20.8 seconds. Apply this change to (2) and (3) in Method 1 and (3) in Method 2 to determine DTR requirements for a system with the charge account for CDR option. The following is assumed: - 50% of the Digitone [...]

  • Страница 247

    4-4 Feature calculations Calculations with Direct inward System Access (DISA) This method is used when a system is equipped with DISA. The following is assumed: - The DISA calls come through DISA trunks or DID trunks.’ - 75% of DISA calls require security code. - The average number of digits in the security code is 4 (range is 1 tc 8). - The DISA[...]

  • Страница 248

    Feature calculations 4-5 Calculations with Integrated Message Service (IMS) This method is used when a system is equipped with IMS. The following is assumed: - Only messaging calls from 2500 sets require DigitoneReceiver service - 50-50 split of originating and terminating calls and 135 seconds average call holding time were assumed in Step (a). - [...]

  • Страница 249

    [...]

  • Страница 250

    5-1 Worksheets Worksheets 5-l Growth Forecast: Worksheet A 5-2 Line Usage: Worksheet B 5-4 Network Loop Calculation : Worksheet C 5-6 PE Card Calculations : Worksheet D 5-8 Universal Equipment Module Provisioning : Worksheet E ‘- 5-10 Conference Loop Requirements : Worksheet F 5-11 Unprotected Memory Calculations : Worksheet G 5-13 Protected Memo[...]

  • Страница 251

    5-2 Worksheets Worksheet A Growth forecast One sheet for each customer, one sheet for the system as a whole. Customer: Date: - OUTWATS Fx Private Line Dial Dictation Paging RAN AIOD DTI E&M 2W E&M 4W co System engineering 553-3001-151 .d .- -.[...]

  • Страница 252

    Worksheets 5-3 Worksheet A continued Growth forecast Line CCS/r Total Trunk CCS/T Intra CCSjT System engineering 553-3001-l 51 c. I[...]

  • Страница 253

    5-4 Worksheets Worksheet B One sheet for each customer for cutover, 2-year, and 5-year intervals. One for the system cutover, 2-year, and 5-year intervals. Customer: -year Address: Line usage M2xxx TN X ccsfr = ccs M3xxx TN X ccs/T = ccs SL-1 TN X cc&s/r = ccs 500 TN X ccs/T = ccs 2500 TN X ccs/T = ccs TOTAL LINE LOAD = ccs Trunk usage --- TlWl[...]

  • Страница 254

    Worksheets 5-5 Worksheet B continued TOTAL TRUNK LOAD = CCS Console usage No. of Consoles x 3occcs = Total Console Load Digital Receivers Table #ofDTR Total DTR Load ccs Total Load ‘- ccs System engineering 553-3001-l 51 . .[...]

  • Страница 255

    5-6 Worksheets Work!&?et c One sheet for each customer. One sheet for the complete system. Customer: Address: Network loop calculation Total load (CC9 ccs /Loop Cutover 2-year 5-year = No. of loops Round to next highest figure --- Number of Network Loops Required at 2 Years = Number of Network Groups Required at 2 Years = (Use Table C- 1 Below)[...]

  • Страница 256

    Worksheets 5-7 Worksheet C continued ..:- .: .I-. ‘..: . . Table C-l Network groups required at 2 years No. of Network Groups Maximum No. of Voice Loops 24 48 72 96 120 No DGT Trunks in CCSlLoop 560 500 13440 12000 26880 24000 40320 36000 53760 48000 67200 60000 Wiih DGT Trunks in CCSlLoop 540 485 12960 11640 25920 23280 38880 34920 51840 46560 6[...]

  • Страница 257

    5-8 Worksheets Worksheet D One for the complete system at cutover, 2-year, and 5-year intervals. Customer: Year: Address: Table D-l PE card calculations No. of ISDgl LC CUT = No. of DTR = No. of 500 TN 4 = No. of SL-1 TN 4 = No. of Consoles No. of CO/FX/ Wats/Private Link Trunks = 2 No. of 2-Wire E&M/DX/Pahuz Trunks = 2 2-YR 5YR System engineer[...]

  • Страница 258

    Worksheets 5-9 Worksheet D continued :.: . _,-... :. -cd _ . ./ Table D-l continued e ,.e (I . -..... ;.-‘j -.-=.’ ,*: ‘i PE card calculations CUT 2-YR 5YR . No. of LOOD Sienaline/DID Trunks I I- I 2 No. of Dictation Trunks 2 No. of Recorded Announcement Trunks 4 No. of AIOD Trunks . No. of 4-Wire E&M/DX Trunks 2 TOTAL CARDS Use the total[...]

  • Страница 259

    5-10 Worksheets Table D-l continued PE card calculations No. of Dgtl LC = CUT 2-YR Number of digital ports in service + number of TCM consoles x 6 No. of Anlg LCs = Number of analosr ports in service 16 No. of Anlg M/W LCs = Number of analog norts with Message Waiting feature in service 16 No. of XUT = Total number of CO/DID/RAN/PAGE trunks 8 5-YR [...]

  • Страница 260

    Worksheets 5-l 1 WorksheetE One sheet for the complete system. Customer: Address: Date: UEM provisioning (1) Single network group system CPU UEM PE UEM (2) Multiple network group system CPU UEM Network UEM PE UEM 1 --- System engineering 553-3001-l 51 C. : : . . ..:[...]

  • Страница 261

    5-l 2 Worksheets Worksheet F One sheet for the complete system. Customer: Date: Address: Conference loop requirements Conference loops are provisioned according to the 2-year network loop requirements. Conference Loop Required = Tone and Digit loop requirements Tone and Digit loops are provisioned according to the 2-year network loop requirements. [...]

  • Страница 262

    Worksheets 513 Where: Worksheet F continued Total Line Load is the 2-year figure T = the average processing time for a call in seconds; use 0.6 for a single network group system, or 0.24 for a multiple network group system 150 = the average holding time 2100 = the maximum useable real time of the CPU in seconds System engineering 553-3001-l 51 . .[...]

  • Страница 263

    5-14 Worksheets Woiksheet G One sheet for the complete system. Customer: Date: - Fixed Amount of Storage Required 500+2500TN SL-1 TN Add-On Modules Network Groups Trunk Circuits Consoles Customer Groups Trunk Routes Network Loops (Excluding Conference) RPE Loops Items Words Total --- Total Total words (Include total from second worksheet) (Include [...]

  • Страница 264

    Worksheets 5-l 5 Woiksheet G continued Serial Data Interface Cards MF Senders Conference Card Digitone Receivers Low priority Input High priority Input NO-Type Output Buffers SL- 1 Type Output Buffer Total (Add to first page total) Total words (Add to first page total words) System engineering 553-3001-151 c[...]

  • Страница 265

    5-16 Worksheets Worksheet ‘C continued Memory Card Code Capacity Unprotected Memory Cards Required Memory Card Addresses Required OPC/NT - k words (lk = 1024 Words) System engineering 553-3001-151 . .[...]

  • Страница 266

    Worksheets 5-l 7 iVorksheet H One sheet for the complete system. Customer: Table H-l Date: Gxed Amount of 500+25OOTN kid-On Modules lhnk Circuits Trunk Routes Code Restricted Trunk Routes System engineering 553-3001-l 51[...]

  • Страница 267

    5-18 Worksheets Worksheet H continued Total Add 10% Total words (Include total from third page) (Include total words from third page) Memory Card Code Capacity Protected Memory Cards Required Memory Card Addresses Required OPC/NT k words (lk = 1024 Words) System engineering 553-3001-151 . .[...]

  • Страница 268

    Worksheets 5-l 9 Worksheet H continued One sheet for the complete system. Customer: Table H-l continued Prnterted memnrv calcdatinnn Datei Tone and Digit Switch Conference Card History File Total Total Add 10% Total words (Add to first page total) (Add to first page total words) . / ._ :.. : . . ..I ..I.. :, ; . ._ . . . . . ., . . ,, System engine[...]

  • Страница 269

    5-20 Worksheets Worksheet I One sheet for the complete system. Customer: Date: Program store calculations Program Name Basic Overlay Area Read Only Memory Storage in k (lk = 1024 words) Total = Total x 1024 = k words System engineering 553-3001-151[...]

  • Страница 270

    Worksheets 521 Worksheet I continued Memory Card Code Capacity Program Store Cards Required Memory Card Addresses Required QPCNr k words (1 k = 1024 Words) ;_-.: . : ‘._.. :.’ : “.’ System engineering 553-3001-151 . . :..- : . .[...]

  • Страница 271

    5-22 Worksheets Worksheet J Equipment summary One sheet for the complete system. Customer: Da&e: Table J-l Equipment summary Equipment summary Quantity Based on figure Line and Trunk Cards Cutover Digitone Receivers Unprotected Memory Cards 2Year 2Year Protected Memory Cards 2Year Conference Loops Tone and Digit -Ps 2Year 2Year Call Registers H[...]

  • Страница 272

    Worksheets $23 Worksheet J continued One sheet for the complete system. Customer: Table J-1 continued Equipment summarv I 5 I I Central Processing Date: Network Groups . . . . . . . ,: System engineering 553-3001-151 . . : :[...]

  • Страница 273

    5-24 Worksheets WorksheetK One sheet for the complete system. Customer: Table K-l Balancing network loops over network groups Date: - Customer Network Network Group 0 Group 1 Network Group 2 Network Group 3 Network Group 4 System engineering 553-3001-151 C. : ::[...]

  • Страница 274

    Worksheets 525 Work!dleet L One sheet for the complete system. Customer: Date: _ - ;:.- ‘,“-.::.: : :‘; :. .:,::.; Load balancing Total system load Voice loops required PE UEMs required ccs Average CCS per UEM =Tatalsystemload= ccs PE UEMs required Average CCS per Loop Table L-l Load balancing = Tota1 svstem load CCS = ccs Voice loops require[...]

  • Страница 275

    5-26 Worksheets Worksheet L continued One sheet for the complete system. Customer: Table L-l Load balancing Date: Loop number UEMs assigned CCS per loop CCS per UEM System engineering 553-3001-151[...]

  • Страница 276

    Worksheets 527 Worksheet M Customer: Date: One sheet for the complete system. Card distribution Divide the total number of a card type by the total number of BE UEMs to arrive at a cards-peNEM figure: Table M-l Card distribution System engineering 553-3001-151 . .[...]

  • Страница 277

    5-28 Worksheets WorksheetN One sheet for the complete system. Customer: Date: Table N-l Multiple Appearance Group (MAG) assignments MAG No. MAG No. SL-1 TN SL-1 TN 5ooTN 5ool-N MAG No. MAG No. SL-1 TN SL-1 TN 500-I-N 5ooTN MAG No. MAG No. SL-1 TN SL-1 TN 5ooTN 5ooTN SL-1 Packs 500 Packs SL-1 Packs 500 Packs Loop number MAG No. SL-1 TN 5ooTN MAG No.[...]

  • Страница 278

    Worksheets 5-29 -Worksheet 0 One sheet for the complete system. Customer: Date: - Station load balancing Total SL-1 TN to be assigned Less number of SL-1 TN assigned to MAG m Equals number of SL-1 TN not in MAG = TOTAL SL-1 TN not in MAG Number of 500 TN not in MAG assigned per UEM TOTAL 500 TN to be assigned Less number of 500 TN assigned to MAG E[...]

  • Страница 279

    5-30 Worksheets Worksheet 0 continued Total 2500 TN to be assigned Less number of 2500 TN assigned to MAC Equals number of 2500 TN not in MAG 2500 TN not in MAG Number of 2500 TN not in MAG assigned per UEM System engineering 553-3001-151[...]

  • Страница 280

    Worksheets 531 -Worksheet P Customer: Date: Table P-l Card to UEM assignment Loop number UEM number Table P-2 Card to UEM assignment Loop number UEM number System engineering 553-3001-151 C. .. .- -.[...]

  • Страница 281

    5-32 Worksheets Customer: Table P-3 Card to OEM assignment Worksheet .P continued Date: Loop number UEM number Table P-4 Card to UEM assignment Total packs ccs load Loop number UEM number System engineering 553-3001-151[...]

  • Страница 282

    Worksheets 5-33 -Worksheet Q One sheet for each PE UEM in the system. Date: DN = Directory Number RTMB = Route Member Number Loop number UEM number Group number Table Q-l TN assignment record Pack pos 2 Pack type 1 Pack CeT 1 DN 1 RTMB 1 CUST In I I I 6 III 7 System engineering 553-3001-151 Y[...]

  • Страница 283

    5-34 Worksheets Worksheet Q continued Date: DN = Directory Number RTMB = Route Member Number Loop number UEM number Group number - Table Q-1 continued TN assignment record Pack pas 4 5 6 System engineering 553-3001-151 C. .:[...]

  • Страница 284

    Worksheets 535 Worksheet Q continued Table Q-l continued TN assignment record hop #- UEM # Grp L.- Pack pos 7 8 System engineering 553-3001-151[...]

  • Страница 285

    5-36 Worksheets WorksheetR SL-1 system assignment plan Prepared by: Date: System: Customer: One sheet for each equipped voice loop. Loop number Group number UEMs equipped Trunks working Trunks equipped Consoles Digitone receivers 2500 TN 500 TN SL-1 TN MAG assigned Load capacity Recommended assignment plan System engineering 553-3001-151[...]

  • Страница 286

    Worksheets 537 ‘WorksheetS Multiple appearance group record Prepared by: Date: System: Customer: Table S-l Multiple appearance group record MAG LP. EXT. I stat. I Set I System engineering 553-3001-151 2.[...]

  • Страница 287

    ..A[...]

  • Страница 288

    6-1 Tables Tables 6-1 Table 6-l : Trunk Traffic 6-1 Table 6-2: Trunk Traffic 6-3 Table 6-3: Digitone Receiver Requirements 6-5 Table 6-4 : Digitone Receiver Requirements 6-7 Table 6-5: Digitone Receiver Requirements 6-9 Table 6-6: Digitone Receiver Requirements 6-l 1 Table 6-7: Digitone Receiver Requirements 6-l 3 Table 6-8: Digitone Receiver Requi[...]

  • Страница 289

    6-2 Tables Table 6-1 Trunk traffic (Poisson 1% blocking) TRKS ccs 1 0.4 2 5.4 3 15.7 4 29.6 5 46.1 6 64 7 84 8 105 9 126 10 149 11 172 12 195 13 220 14 244 15 269 16 294 17 320 18 346 19 373 20 399 21 426 22 453 23 480 24 507 25 535 26 562 27 590 28 618 29 647 30 675 TRKS ccs 31 703 32 732 33 760 34 789 35 818 36 847 37 876 38 905 39 935 40 964 41 [...]

  • Страница 290

    Tables 6-3 Table 6-2 Trunk traffic (Poisson 2% blocking) TRKS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 ccs 4 7.9 20.9 36.7 55.8 76.0 96.8 119 142 166 191 216 241 267 293 TRKS ccs 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 744 773 803 832 862 892 922 952 982 1012 1042 1072 1103 1133 1164 TRKS ccs 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 1659 1690 1[...]

  • Страница 291

    6-4 Tables Table 6-2 continued Trunk traffic (Poisson 2% blocking) TRKS CCS TRKS CCS TRKS CCS TRKS CCS TRKS CCS 16 320 46 1194 76 2130 106 3094 136 4072 17 347 47 1125 77 2162 107 3126 137 4105 18 374 48 1255 78 2194 108 3158 138 4138 19 401 49 1286 79 2226 109 3190 139 4171 20 429 50 1317 80 2258 110 3223 140 4204 21 458 51 1348 81 2290 111 3255 1[...]

  • Страница 292

    Tables 6-5 Table 6-3 Digitone receiver requirements Nok: Refer to Section 3-15 for the Model assumptions for this table. System engineering 553-3001-151 .u I[...]

  • Страница 293

    6-6 Tables Table 6-4 Digitone receiver requirements Number of Maximum Digitone Number of Maximum Digitone digitone number of receiver load digitone number of receiver load receivers digitone line! (CCS) receivers digitohe lines (C’CS) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 2 2 17 843 253 21 7 18 920 276 52 15 19 996 299 90 27 20 1076 323 134 40 21 [...]

  • Страница 294

    Table 6-5 Digitone receiver requirements Tables 6-7 13 14 15 16 548 203 28 1697 628 618 229 29 1781 659 689 255 30 1864 690 762 282 Note: Refer to Section 3-15 for the Model assumptions for this table. System engineering 553-3001-151[...]

  • Страница 295

    6-8 Tables Table 6-6 Digitone receiver requirements Number of Maximum Digitone Number of Maximum Digitone digitone number of receiver digitone number of receiver receivers digitone load (CCS) receivers digitone ‘load (CCS: lines lines 2 4 2 17 683 253 3 18 7 18 745 276 4 41 15 19 808 299 5 72 27 20 872 323 6 109 40 21 935 346 7 148 55 22 1000 370[...]

  • Страница 296

    Tables 6-9 Table6-7 Digitone receiver load capacity in CCS Average holding time in seconds Number of digitone receivers 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 106 101 91 94 91 89 131 125 120 116 113 111 157 150 144 140 136 133 185 176 170 165 161 157 212 203 196 190 185 182 241 231 223 216 211 207 270 259 250 243 237 233 300 288 278 271 26[...]

  • Страница 297

    6-10 Tables Table 6-7 continued Digitone receiver load capacity in CCS Average holding time in seconds Number Of digitone receivers 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 . 14 15 0 0 0 0 000 0 0 0 487 517 550 583 615 647 680 714 746 779 813 847 882 913 947 981 1016 1051 1083 1117 System engineering 553-3001-[...]

  • Страница 298

    Tables 6-11 Table 6-8 Digitone receiver load capacity in CCS Average holding time in seconds Number Of digitone receivers 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 16 1 17 1 18 ( 19 ( 192 190 189 18 30 45 62 80 100 121 142 165 188 211 236 260 286 312 337 364 25 4 1’ 2! 4 6( 71 9 111 131 16( 18: 20( 23( 25 27! 30: 32! 35’ L System engin[...]

  • Страница 299

    6-12 Tables Table 6-8 continued Digitone receiver load capacity in CCS Average holding time in seconds Number of digitone receivers 21 402 391 9 396 393 39 22 431 42 7 424 421 41’ 23 458 454 4 451 448 44 24 486 48: 2 478 475 47: 25 514 5113 506 503 50 26 544 53! 9 535 532 52’ 27 573 56! 9 565 561 55: 28 603 591 8 594 590 58 29 631 62i 5 622 618[...]

  • Страница 300

    Tables 6-13 Table 6-9 Digitone receiver requirements (Poisson 0.1% blocking) Number of digitone Number of digitone System engineering 553-3001-151 . . : I[...]

  • Страница 301

    6-14 Tables Table 6-10 Network group capacities Number of Maximum number No figitonetrunks Digitone trunks network of 744 I 560 I 500 720/5401485 groups voice loops CCS per loop CCS per loop 1 1 24 17850 / 13440 / 12000 17280 / 12960 / 11640 2 48 35700 / 26880 / 24000 34560 I25920 / 23280 3 72 53550 I40320 I36000 51840 138880 / 34920 4 96 71400 / 5[...]

  • Страница 302

    Tables 6-15 ..: .- ._.*: _- ..-I. _;: !,;z‘+ .f ,.., ;; -.’ ..’ .,:., Table 6-10 TDS and CONF loop requirements Network loops Tone and Digit Conference loops required at 2 years Switch required loops required 1-12 1 1 13-24 2 2 25-36 3 3 37-48 4 4 49-60 5 5 61-72 6 6 73-84 7 7 85-96 8 8 97- 108 9 9 m-120 10 10 System engineering 553-3001-l 51[...]

  • Страница 303

    6-16 Tables Table 6-l 1 Digitone receiver provisioning (assumes 1 l-second holding time) 70-89 8 920-9s 1 38 go-111 9 952-984 39 I 11,l 1’12 11/L-121) 10 985-1017 40 I 134-157 11 1018-1050 41 12 1051-1084 42 43 158-182 183-207 13 1085-1118 208-233 14 1119-1153 1 44 234-259 I 15 I 1154-1188 45 260-286 16 1189-1223 46 I 287-3 13 I 17 I 1; !24-1258 [...]

  • Страница 304

    Tables 6-17 Table 6-11 continued Digitone receiver provisioning (assumes 11-second holding time) DTR CCS DTR ports 1751-1785 62 DTR CCS 2871-2905 - DTR ports 94 1786-1820 63 2906-2940 95 1821-1855 64 294 l-2975 I 96 I 1856-1890 65 2976-3010 97 1891-1925 66 3011-3045 98 1926- 1960 67 1 3046-3080 99 1961-1995 68 3081-3115 100 1996-2030 69 3116-3465 1[...]

  • Страница 305

    SL-1 System options 21,51,61,71 System engineering Copyright 0 1990 Northern Telecom All rights reserved. Information subject to change without notice. Release 1 .O Standard January 29,199O Printed in U.S.A.[...]

  • Страница 306

    SL-1 Generic Xl 1 Memory calculations Standard, release 15[...]

  • Страница 307

    [...]

  • Страница 308

    SL-1 Generic Xl 1 Memory calculations Publication number: 553-2201-151 Appendix 1 Product release: Xl 1 release 15 Document release: 1 .O Document status: Standard Date: December 20,1989 0 1984 Northern Telecom All rights reserved. Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1 C.[...]

  • Страница 309

    ii Revision history December 1989 Standard, release 1.0. This Publication is reissued as the Standard version for Relaes 15. Changes are marked with R15. Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1 c[...]

  • Страница 310

    Contents . . . Ill General Memory description 3 Memory Generic 711 (S and MS) 5 Memory Generics 811 and 911 (N and XN) 5 Memory Generics 1011 (ST) 5 Memory Generics 1111,1211, and 1311 (NT, XT, and RT) 5 Templates 6 Memory calculations Package dependencies Program store requirements Unprotected data storage requirements Protected data storage requi[...]

  • Страница 311

    iv Contents Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1[...]

  • Страница 312

    1 General . ., ! ,:-,. :“‘.:. . ^ ( .,../ This Appendix provides memory information relating to the SL-1 Integrated Services Network (EN). Engineering and assigning of equipment (553-2201-151) provides provisioning information and the associated data worksheets for a complete system. For Generic Xl 1, Engineering and assigning of equipment (553[...]

  • Страница 313

    2 General Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1 . . .: .- -.[...]

  • Страница 314

    3 Memory description Software and office data are stored in a read/write Random Access Memory (RAM). The RAM is organized into modules of 128K, 192K, 256K, 512K or 768K by 16bit words, or 24-bit words for NT, RT, and XT machines in Release 12 and later. Memory size depends on the features programmed into the machine and the number and type of stati[...]

  • Страница 315

    4 Memory description Table 2 QPC memory module packs per system- Memory MS/S N XN NT/FIT XT ST size 128K 1 - 478 l-479 1 - 479 192K 1 - 423 l-426 1 - 426 256K 2 - 478 2-479 2-479 OR 1 - 674 320K l-426 1 - 478 + + 1 - 479 l- 479 384K 2-426 2-426 512K 1 - 672 1 - 672 1 - 673 576K 3-426 768K 4 - 426 1 - 583 1 - 583 1536K 1 - 583 2 - 583 2304K 3 - 583 [...]

  • Страница 316

    Memory description 5 Memory Generic 711 (S and MS) The memory requirements for a Generic 7 11 system consists of a Read Only Memory (ROM) circuit pack and RAM circuit pack(s). The memory system is divided into pages. The unprotected and protected data stores are usually assigned to pages 0 and 1. The bottom 8K words of page 2 are replaced with the [...]

  • Страница 317

    6 Memory description The ROM for Generic 1111; 1211, and 13 11 is contained in a QPC579 CPU Function Unit. Templates A template is a map of the pattern of keys/features assigned to a telephone, The protected data structure for the SL- 1 NE-500/2500 and digital telephones is based on the concept of shared templates. For example, if two or more telep[...]

  • Страница 318

    Memory description 7 (c) Use Overlay 20 of 553-300140 to m&ntain a current list of all templates defined in the system. Consult this list whenever service change of telephones is to be performed. Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1 . .[...]

  • Страница 319

    8 Memory description --- Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1 . .[...]

  • Страница 320

    9 _- : : :.::. :: ! , .:. . -, ., , ,, ., : Memory calculations The memory requirement for Xl 1 Generic must be calculated individually using the following tables: Table Storage 3 Software Program 4 Unprotected Data 5 Protected Data Record the memory requirements on worksheets G, H and I and add this- data to the other completed main practice works[...]

  • Страница 321

    10 Memory calculations Note 2:The memory calculations for the RT (1311) machine are the same as for the NT (1111) machine type. The absence of Generic release indicator R4, R5, or R7 in the Version column indicates the storage words for the associated program applies to all Generic releases. Package dependencies Each Generic contains a basic featur[...]

  • Страница 322

    Table 3 Software program storage requirements : ,.., ! -.. : .:. :L.-,T ,‘,,.:_j; i _,-. .: ,.; ./ Memory calculations 11 Program Version Storage in Ks Comments (1K = 1024 words) Resident (Basic) 711 R4 73.88 711 R5 77.04 - 711 R7 85.59 711 R8 87.61 711 R9 90.24 711 RlO 96.70 711 R12 112.74 711 R13 122.62 811 R4 77.15 811 R5 81.96 811 R7 89.67 81[...]

  • Страница 323

    12 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program Version Storage in K S Comments (1K = 1024 words) Read/Write Firmware 711 R4-10 0.74 (Note 1) - 711 R12-13 0.36 811 R4 0.34 811 R5 0.35 811 R7-8 0.35 811/1011 R9-10 0.39 811/1011 R12-15 0.55 911 R4 0.40 911 R5 0.77 911 R7-10 0.77 911 R12-14 Note 1 111 l/121 1 R[...]

  • Страница 324

    Memory calculations I 3 Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program Version Storage in K S Comments UK = 1024 words) Overlay Area 711 R4 10.58 711 R5 15.74‘ 711 R7 16.46 711 R8 16.92 711 R9 16.96 711 RlO 17.12 711 R12 18.07 711 R13 10.75 811 R4 11.00 811 R5 15.58 811 R7 16.46 811 R8 16.94 811/1011 R9 17.42 . 811/1011 RlO 17.[...]

  • Страница 325

    Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) PrOgWll Version Storage in K S Comments (1K = 1024 words) OF-IF 711,811,911,1011, 0 All Releases 1111,121l 1011 R15 17.67 1111/1211 12.58 CUST 711,811,911,1011, 1111,121l 1011 R15 1111/1211 R15 0 9.19 6.38 All Releases AIOD 711 R4-12 0.88 711 R13 0.91 811 R4-8 0.88 . 811/1011 R9-12 0.88 81 l[...]

  • Страница 326

    :, _.. ‘... .:‘;;.:;:: :;:: I. .,, ..s. ,.,! -I _’ Memory calculations 15 Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program Version Storage in K S Comments (1K = 1024 words) CDR 711 R4 1.77 711 RS - 1.80 711 R7 1.94 711 R8 1.99 711 R9 2.05 711 RlO 2.20 711 R12 2.38 711 R13 2.47 811 R4 1.77 811 R5 1.79 811 R7 1.94 811 R8 1.98 8[...]

  • Страница 327

    16 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program Version Storage in K S Comments (1K = 1024 words) CDR TTY 711 R4 0.56 711 RS 0.57 - 711 R7 0.59 711 R8 0.71 711 R9 0.72 711 RlO 0.99 711 R12 1.07 711 R13 1.16 811 R4,5 0.56 811 R7 0.59 811 R8 0.71 811 R9 0.72 811 RlO 0.99 811/1011 R12 1.07 811/1011 R13-15 1.16 [...]

  • Страница 328

    Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) ::. :. 1.... /:_ . . :.; Memory calculations 17 Program Version Storage in K S Comments (1K = 1024 words) CDR CLNK 711 R4-5 0.56_ 711 R7-9 0.59 711 RlO 0.66 711 R12 0.69 711 R13 0.81 811 R4-5 0.56 811 R7-8 0.59 Sll/lOll R9 0.59 811/1011 RlO 0.66 811/1011 R12 0.69 811/1011 R13 0.81 811/1011 R[...]

  • Страница 329

    18 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) PrOgEUU Version Storage iu K S Comments (1K = 1024 words) RAN 711 R4 1.34 711 R5 1.34 - 711 R7-8 1.36 711 R9 1.41 711 RlO-12 1.49 711 R13 1.55 811 R4 1.33 811 R5 1.34 811 R7-8 1.36 811/1011 R9 1.40 81 l/101 1 RlO-12 1.49 811/1011 R13 1.55 811/1011 R14 1.54 911 R4-5 1.3[...]

  • Страница 330

    Memory calculations 19 Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program Version Storage in K S Comments (1K = 1024 words) TAD 711 R4-5 0.71 DNDI 711 R7-12 0.72 - 711 R13 0.76 811 R4-5 0.71 811 R7-8 0.72 811/1011 R9-12 0.72 81 l/1011 R13-15 0.76 911R4-5 0.72 911 R7-12 0.73 911 R13-14 0.77 1111/1211 R8-12 0.54 1111/1211 R13-15 0.56 .[...]

  • Страница 331

    20 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program Version Storage in K S Comments (1K = 1024 words) EES 711 R4 0.60 711 R5 0.79 - 711 R7 0.76 711 R8 0.75 711 R9 0.79 711 RlO 0.81 711 R12 0.83 711 R13 0.87 811 R4 0.60 811 R5 0.79 811 R7-8 0.76 81 l/101 1 R9 0.81 81 l/101 1 RlO 0.83 Sll/lOll R12 0.85 811/1011 R1[...]

  • Страница 332

    Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Memory calculations 21 Program Version Storage in K S Comments (1K = 1024 words) 711 R4-9 1.54 711 RlO 1.56 711 R12 1.59 711 R13 1.65 811 R4-8 1.53 81 l/1011 R9 1.53 81 l/101 1 RlO 1.55 81 l/1011 R12- 1.58 811/1011 R13 1.64 811/1011 R14 1.66 911 R4 1.52 911 R5 1.52 911 R7-9 1.51 . . 911 RlO [...]

  • Страница 333

    22 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program Version Storage in K S Comments UK = 1024 words) 711 R4-12 0.20 _ 711 R13 0.22 811 R4-8 0.20 81 l/101 1 R9-12 0.20 811/1011 R13-15 0.22 911 R4-12 0.19 911 R13-14 0.22 111 l/121 1 R8-12 0.16 1111/1211 R13 0.17 1111/1211 R15 0.18 - continued - . ., . -. . . . .._[...]

  • Страница 334

    Memory calculations 23 Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) _ .,_ ‘-.--- . .’ _ ., .._. ,y,;’ : .., : Program Version Storage in Ks Comments (1K = 1024 words) BRTE 711 R4 4.95 711 R5 5.48 - 711 R7 5.61 711 R8 5.68 711 R9 5.74 711 RlO 5.86 711 R12 6.81 711R13 7.00 811 R4 4.95 811 R5 5.47 811 R7 5.61 811 R8 5.68 811/1011 R9[...]

  • Страница 335

    24 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program Version Storage in K S Comments (1K = 1024 words) RPE 711 R4-9 0.99 - 711 RlO-12 1.00 711 R13 1.02 811 R4-8 1.00 811/1011 R9 1.00 Sll/lOll RlO-12 1.01 811/1011 R13 1.03 811/1011 R14-15 1.02 911 R4-9 0.98 911 RlO-12 1.00 911 R13-14 1.01 111 l/121 1 R8-9 0.77 111[...]

  • Страница 336

    Memory calculations 25 Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program Version Storage in K S Comments (1K = 1024 words) MSB 711 R4-5 0.08 711 R7-12 0.10‘ 711 R13 0.13 811 R4-5 0.08 811 R7-8 0.10 811/1011 R9-12 0.10 811/1011 R13 0.13 811/1011 R14 0.19 911 R4-5 0.08 911 R7-9 0.09 911 RlO-12 0.10 911 R13 0.13 911 R14 0.19 . 1011 R[...]

  • Страница 337

    26 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) progr~ Version Storage in KS Comments (1K = 1024 words) ss25 711 R8 0.61 711 R9-10 0.62 - 711 R12 0.64 711 R13 0.67 811 R8 0.61 811/1011 R9-10 0.62 811/1011 R12 0.64 811/1011 R13 0.67 81 l/1011 R14 0.72 911 R4-5,8-10 0.61 911 R7 0.60 911 R12 0.63 911 R13 0.66 911 R14 0[...]

  • Страница 338

    Memory calculations 27 Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program Version Storage in K S Comments (1K = 1024 words) DDSP 711 R4 1.81 711 R5 1.82 - 711 R7 2.10 711 R8 2.11 711 R9 2.47 711 RlO 2.98 711 R12-13 3.37 811 R4 1.81 811 RS 1.82 811 R7 2.10 811 R8 2.11 811/1011 R9 2.47 811/1011 RlO 2.98 . 811/1011 R12 3.36 811/1011 R13[...]

  • Страница 339

    28 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program Version Storage in K S Comments UK = 1024 words) ODAS 711,811/1011,911 1.12 711,811/1011,911 R9 _ 1.22 711,811/1011,911 1.21 RlO-12 711,811/1011 R13 1.22 811/1011 R14 1.22 911 R13-14 1.20 1011 R15 0.72 1111/1211 R8 0.88 1111/1211 R9 0.96 1111/1211 RlO-12 0.94 1[...]

  • Страница 340

    Memory calculations 29 Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program Version Storage in K S Comments (1K = 1024 words) DI 711 R4-5 0.58 711 R7 0.61‘ 711 R8-9 0.63 711 RlO 0.65 711 R12 0.68 711 R13 0.67 811 R4-5 0.58 811 R7 0.61 811 R8 0.63 Sll/lOll R9 0.63 81 l/101 1 RlO-12 0.65 811/1011 R13 0.67 81 l/101 1 R14 0.70 _. 911 R4-[...]

  • Страница 341

    30 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) hOgGUll Version Storage in KS Comments (1K = 1024 words) DISA 711 R4-5 0.28 - 711 R7 0.29 711 R8-10 0.30 711 R12-13 0.32 811 R4-5 0.28 811 R7 0.29 811 R8 0.30 811/1011 R9-10 0.30 811/1011 R12-13 0.32 Sll/lOll R14 0.34 911 R4 0.27 911 R5 0.28 911 R7-8 0.29 911 R9-10 0.3[...]

  • Страница 342

    .A’,: . :. -.. .’ .:.: : i- .,>: ;., : 1, [ : ,:. :.; j Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Memory calculations 31 Program Version Storage in K S Comments (1K = 1024 words) CHG 711 R4-5 0.24 711 R7 . 0.29 711 R8 0.34 711 R9-12 0.35 711 R13 0.37 811 R4-5 0.24 811 R7 0.29 811 R8 0.34 811/1011 R9-12 0.35 811/1011 R13 0.37 [...]

  • Страница 343

    32 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program Version Storage in K S Comments (1K = 1024 words) CAB 711 R4 1.11 - 711 R5-9 1.12 711 RlO-12 1.14 711 R13 1.24 811 R4 1.11 811 R5-8 1.12 811/1011 R9 1.12 81 l/101 1 RlO-12 1.14 811/1011 R13 1.24 811/1011 R14 1.26 911 R4 1.10 911 R5-7 1.11 911 R8-9 1.12 911 RlO-[...]

  • Страница 344

    Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Memory calculations 33 prOgMtl Version Storage in K S Comments (1K = 1024 words) CASM 711 R4-5 0.14 711 R7-10 - 0.15 711 R12 0.16 711 R13 0.19 811 R4-5 0.14 811 R7-8 0.15 Sll/lOll R9-10 0.15 811/1011 R12- 0.17 Sll/lOll R13 0.19 Sll/lOll R14 0.22 911 R4-5 0.13 911 R7-10 0.15 911 R12 0.17 911 [...]

  • Страница 345

    34 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program Version Storage in K S Comments (1K = 1024 words) 2ASR 711 R4 6.05 711 R5 6.08 - 711 R7 6.53 711 R8 6.54 711 R9 6.60 711 RlO 6.64 711 R12 6.81 711 R13 6.92 811 R4 6.06 811 R5 6.12 811 R7 6.57 811 R8 6.59 Sll/lOll R9 6.65 811/1011 RlO 6.69 81 l/101 1 R12 6.86 81[...]

  • Страница 346

    Memory calculations 35 Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program (1K = 1024 words) BQE Version Storage in KS 711 R4 2.05 Comments 711 R5 2.15. 711 R7 2.27 711 R8 2.29 711 R9 2.33 711 RlO 2.42 711 Rll 2.46 711R12 2.47 711 R13 2.55 811 R4 2.06 811 R5 2.16 811 R7 2.27 811 R8 2.29 . 811/1011 R9 2.33 811/1011 RlO 2.43 811/1011 R1[...]

  • Страница 347

    36 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program Version Storage in K S Comments (1K = 1024 words) VTRF 711 R4-13 811 R4-8 81 l/101 1 R9-15 911 R4-8 911 R9-14 1111/1211 R8 1111/1211 R9-10 1111/1211 R12 1111/1211 R13-15 ZMAC 711 R4-5 711 R7-12 711 R13 811 R4-5 811 R7-8 811/1011 R9-12 81 l/101 1 R13-15 911 R4-5[...]

  • Страница 348

    Memory calculations 37 Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program Version Storage in K S Comments (1K = 1024 words) NCOS 711,811,911,1011 0.10 711,811,911,1011 R13 0.08‘ 811,911,1011 R14-15 0.08 1011 R15 0.08 1111/1211 R8-12 0.08 1111/1211 R13-15 0.06 - continued - Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1 Y[...]

  • Страница 349

    38 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program Version Storage in K S Comments (1K = 1024 words) ZPRK 711 R4-5 3.41 711 R7 3.51 - 711 R8 3.53 711 R9 3.54 711 RlO 3.58 711 R12 3.76 711 R13 3.98 811 R4-5 3.41 811 R7 3.51 811 R8 3.53 811/1011 R9 3.53 Sll/lOll RlO 3.58 811/1011 R12 3.76 . 811/1011 R13 3.98 811/[...]

  • Страница 350

    Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Memory calculations 39 Program Version Storage in K S Comments (1K = 1024 words) ssc 711,811,911,1011 0.10 811,911,1011 R14-15 0.10‘ 1111/1211 R8-15 0.08 IMS (UST, UMG) 711 R4 7.47 711 RS 7.49 711 R7 7.59 711 R8 7.63 711 R9 7.70 711 RlO 2.80 711 R12 2.83 711 R13 3.00 811 R4 7.47 811 R5 7.4[...]

  • Страница 351

    40 Memory calculations ” Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program Version Storage in Ks Comments (1K = 1024 words) ROA 711 0.36 711 RlO 0.36 . 711 R12 0.38 711 R13 0.40 811/1011 0.38 811/1011 RlO 0.38 811/1011 R12 0.38 811/1011 R13 0.40 811/1011 R14 0.42 911 R4-7 0.36 911 R8 0.10 911 RlO 0.27 911 R12 0.10 911 R13-14 0.11 [...]

  • Страница 352

    Memory calculations 41 Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued)’ I prOgMIU Version Storage in K S Comments (lK = 1024 words) WG 711 R4 2.03 711 R5-7 2.30 711 RS-10 2.32 711 R12-13 2.63 811 R4 2.03 811 R5-7 2.30 811 R8 2.32 811/1011 R9-10 2.32 811/1011 R12-13 2.63 Sll/lOll R14 2.68 911 R4 1.99 911 R5-7 2.26 911 R8-10 2.27 6 . 911 [...]

  • Страница 353

    42 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) 1 L Program Version Storage in K S Comments (1K = 1024 words) MCBQ 711 R4 2.53 711 R5 2.56 711 R7 2.66 711 R8 2.67 711 RlO-12 2.68 711 R13 2.76 811 R4 2.54 811 R5 2.57 811 R7 2.68 811 R8 2.67 811/1011 R9 2.69 81 l/101 1 RlO-12 2.70 811/1011 R13 2.78 811/1011 R14 2.81 9[...]

  • Страница 354

    Memory calculations 43 Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) ! I :y_:.- ..,. :-,<: i .,;--;:.:. ; 1 Program Version Storage in K S Comments (1K = 1024 words) BACD 711 R4 8.98 711 R5 9.01‘ 711 R7 10.68 711 R8 10.91 711 R9 11.64 711 RlO 12.79 711 R12 15.02 711R13 15.66 811 R4 8.99 811 R5 9.01 811 R7 10.86 811 R8 10.92 81 l/10[...]

  • Страница 355

    44 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program Version Storage in K S Comments (1K = 1024 words) ACDB 711 0.05 711 R12 0.09 - 711 R13 0.12 811 R4-7 0.05 811 R8 0.04 81 l/101 1 R9-10 0.05 81 l/101 1 R12 0.09 811/1011 R13-14 0.12 911 0.05 911 R12 0.09 911 R13-14 0.12 1011 R15 0.13 111 l/121 1 R8-10 0.04 111 l[...]

  • Страница 356

    Memory calculations 45 Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) r PrOgKUU (1K = 1024 words) ACDC Version Storage in K S 711 R4 13.54 711 R5 13.49 . 711 R7 14.16 711 R8 14.19 711 R9 14.75 711 RlO 15.77 711 R12 16.97 711R13 17.99 811 R4 13.54 811 R5 13.49 811 R7 14.16 811 R8 14.19 811/1011 R9 14.75 811/1011 RlO 15.77 811/1011 R12 16.[...]

  • Страница 357

    46 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program Version Storage in K S Comments (1K = 1024 words) MUS 711 R4-5 1.03 . 711 R7-9 1.04 711 RlO 1.05 711 R12 1.28 711 R13 1.29 811 R4 1.03 811 R5-7 1.04 811/1011 R8-10 1.05 Sll/lOll R12 1.06 Sll/lOll R13-14 1.29 911 R4-5 1.28 911 R7-9 1.01 911 RlO 1.02 911 R12 1.03[...]

  • Страница 358

    Memory calculations 47 Table3 Software program storage requirements (continuedj Program Version Storage in K S Comments (1K = 1024 words) MWC 711 R4-5 1.19 711 R7-8 1.24 711 R9 1.26 711 RlO 1.29 711 R12 1.38 711 R13 1.42 811 R4-5 1.19 811 R7-8 1.24 811/1011 R9 1.26 811/1011 RlO 1.29 811/1011 R12 1.38 811/1011 R13 1.42 811/1011 R14 1.43 . . 911 R4-5[...]

  • Страница 359

    48 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program Version Storage in K S Comments (1K = 1024 words) AAB 711 R4-5 0.07 _ 711 R7-13 0.11 811 R4-5 0.07 811/1011 R7-14 0.11 911 R4-5 0.07 911 R7-14 0.11 1011 R15 0.12 1111/1211 R8 0.08 1111/1211 R9-13 0.09 1111/1211 R14-15 0.08 - continued - Memory calculations 553-[...]

  • Страница 360

    .::- .“’ ‘L’..’ “. ,, . . . . . . . . ,,T,, ,. .:. ,, ., Memory calculations 49 Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program Version Storage in K S Comments (1K = 1024 words) GRP 711 R4 2.19 711 R5 2.17 711 R7 2.20 711 R8-9 2.22 711 RlO 2.26 711 Rll 2.25 711R12 2.29 711 R13 2.13 811 R4 2.18 811 RS 2.17 811 R7 2.19 8[...]

  • Страница 361

    50 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program Version Storage in Ks Comments (1K = 1024 words) NFCR 7 11 (before R9) 0.29 _ 711 R9 0.38 711 RlO 0.44 711 R12 0.46 711 R13 0.50 8 11 (before R9) 0.29 811/1011 R9 0.38 811/1011 RlO 0.44 811/1011 R12 0.46 811/1011 R13-15 0.50 9 11 (before R9) 0.29 911 R9 0.38 91[...]

  • Страница 362

    Memory calculations 51 Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program Version Storage in K S Comments (1K = 1024 words) 9CDD 711 R4-5 2.22 711 R7-9 2.23 - 711 RlO 2.50 711 R12 2.83 711 R13 1.50 811 R4-5 2.22 81 l/101 1 R7-9 2.23 811/1011 RlO 2.53 811/1011 R12 2.83 Sll/lOll R13-15 1.50 911 R4-5 2.19 911 R7 2.20 911 R8-9 2.21 .- 91[...]

  • Страница 363

    52 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) ! Program Version Storage in K S Comments (1K = 1024 words) 3R 711 R4-5 4.13 711 R7 4.36 - 711 R8 4.51 711 R9 4.87 711 RlO 5.48 711 R12 5.97 711 R13 6.19 811 R4-5 4.13 811 R7 4.36 811 R8 4.51 811/1011 R9 4.87 81 l/1011 RlO 5.48 811/1011 R12 5.97 . Sll/lOll R13 6.19 811[...]

  • Страница 364

    Memory calculations 53 Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued)’ _- ,. . . . . ‘.: ..’ .F ,::3 .:.:- :, :. :: ., . .:, ; Program Version Storage in K S Comments (1K = 1024 words) AA 711 R4-5 0.55 711 R7 0.59 711 R8-12 0.65 711 R13 0.64 811 R4-5 0.58 811 R7 0.59 Sll/lOll R8-14 0.65 911 R4-5 0.57 911 R7 0.58 911 R8-14 0.64 1011[...]

  • Страница 365

    54 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program Version Storage in K S Comments (1K = 1024 words) AOP 711 R4-5 0.42 _ 711 R7 0.54 711 R8 0.62 711 R9-12 0.63 711 R13 0.65 811 R4-5 0.42 811 R7 0.54 811 R8 0.62 811/1011 R9-12 0.63 811/1011 R13 0.65 811/1011 R14 0.64 911 R4-5 0.42 911 R7 0.52 911 R8 0.60 911 RlO[...]

  • Страница 366

    Memory calculations 55 Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued)’ Program Version Storage in KS Comments (1K = 1024 words) BARS 711,811,911,1011, 0 All, Releases 1111/1211 ?TARS 711,811,911,1011, 1111/1211 0 All Releases CDP PQm 711,811,911,1011 711,811/101iR13 81 l/101 1 R14-15 911 R13 911 R14 1111/1211 R14-15 711,811,911,1011, 1[...]

  • Страница 367

    56 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) PrOgWIl Version Storage in K S Comments (1K = 1624 words) NAUT 711 R4-5 0.49 711 R7-12 0.50 - 711 R13 0.51 811 R4-5 0.49 811 R7 0.50 81 l/101 1 RS-12 0.50 811/1011 R13 0.51 811/1011 R14 0.55 911 R4-5 0.48 911 R7-12 0.49 911 R13 0.50 911 R14 0.54 1011 R15 0.57 1111/1211[...]

  • Страница 368

    Memory calculations 57 Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program Version Storage in K S Comments (1K = 1024 words) SNR 711 R4-5 0.76 _ 711 R7 0.78 711 R8-12 0.84 711 R13 0.85 811 R4-5 0.76 811 R7 0.78 811/1011 R8-l?, 0.84 811/1011 R13 0.85 811/1011 R14 0.93 911 R4-5 0.75 911 R7 0.77 911 R8-12 0.83 911 R13 0.85 . . 911 R14 0.[...]

  • Страница 369

    58 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program (1K = 1024 words) I’DET Version 711 R4 711 R5-12 711 R13 811 R4 811 R5-7 811/1011 R8-12 Sll/lOll R13-14 911 R4 911 R5-12 911 R13-14 1011 R15 1111/1211 R8-14 1111/1211 R15 Comments Storage in K S 0.36 . 0.39 0.42 0.36 0.38 0.38 0.42 0.35 0.38 0.41 0.45 0.30 0.[...]

  • Страница 370

    Memory calculations 59 Table3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program Version Storage in K S Comments (1K = 1024 words) ATVN 711 R4 4.99 - 711 R5-7 5.00 711 R8 5.02 711 R9 5.03 711 RlO 5.12 711 R12 5.18 711 R13 5.25 811 R4 4.97 811 R5-7 4.98 811 R8 5.00 811/1011 R9 5.01 811/1011 RlO 5.10 811/1011 R12 5.17 81 l/1011 R13 5.24 811/10[...]

  • Страница 371

    60 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program Version Storage in K S Comments (1K = 1024 words) HOT 711 (before RlO) 0 . 711 RlO-12 0.24 711 R13 0.26 811/1011 (beforeR10) 0 81 l/101 1 RlO-12 0.24 811/1011 R13 0.25 811/1011 R14-15 0.26 911 (before RlO) 0 911 RlO-12 0.24 911 R13 0.25 911 R14 0.26 1111/1211 ([...]

  • Страница 372

    Memory calculations 61 Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program Version Storage in K S Comments (1K = 1024 words) ss5 711,811,911,1011, 0.01 - All Releases 1111/1211 DRNG 711 R4-5,7 0.41 711 R8 0.49 711 R9 0.48 711 RlO 0.68 711 R12 0.70 711 R13 0.58 811 R4-5,7 0.41 811 R8 0.49 811/1011 R9 0.48 81 l/101 1 RlO-12 0.70 . 811/1[...]

  • Страница 373

    62 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program (1K = 1024 words) PBXI Version 711 R5 711 R7 711 R8 711 R9-10 711 R12 711 R13 811 R5 811 R7 811 R8 811/1011 R9-10 811/1011 R12 811/1011 R13 811/1011 R14 911 R5 911 R7 911 RS 911 R9 911 RlO 911 R12 911 R13 911 R14 1011 R15 1111/1211 R8 1111/1211 R9 1111/1211 RlO[...]

  • Страница 374

    Memory calculations 63 Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program (1K = 1024 words) DLDN Version Storage in K S 711 R5-13 0.09. 811 R5-7 0.09 Sll/lOll R8-15 0.09 911 R5-15 0.09 1111/1211 R8-13 0.06 1111/1211 R15 0.07 Comments 4MF 711 R5 1.37 711 R7-8 1.44 711 R9 1.46 711 RlO-12 1.47 711 R13 1.57 811 R5 1.37 . 811 R7-8 1.44 81[...]

  • Страница 375

    64 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program Version Storage in K S Comments (1K = 1024 words) CSL 711 R7 13.96 711 R8 14.68 711 R9 15.10 711 RlO 15.08 711 R12 17.04 711 R13 17.65 811 R7 13.96 811 R8 14.68 811 R9 15.10 81 l/1011 RlO 15.08 81 l/101 1 R12 17.04 81 l/1011 R13 17.64 811/1011 R14 17.65 911 R7 [...]

  • Страница 376

    Memory calculations 65 Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program Version Storage iu K S Comments (1K = 1024 words) JCOS 711 R7-8 0.22. 711 R9 0.24 711 RlO-13 0.25 811 R7 0.22 811 R8 0.21 811/1011 R9 0.24 81 l/101 1 RlO-14 0.25 911 R7-8 0.21 911 R9 0.23 911 RlO-12 0.24 911 Rl3-14 0.25 1111/1211 R8 0.17 1111/1211 R9 0.18 . 111[...]

  • Страница 377

    66 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) PrOgEllU Version Storage in K S Comments (1K = 1024 words) CSLA 711 0 . All Releases 811/1011 0 911 0 1111/1211 0 lIENANT 711 R7 0.38 711 R8 0.43 711 R9-12 0.44 711 R13 0.43 811 R7 0.38 81 l/1011 R8 0.43 Sll/lOll R9 0.44 Sll/lOll RlO-12 0.44 811/1011 R13 0.43 Sll/lOll [...]

  • Страница 378

    Memory calculations 67 Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program Version Storage in K S Comments (1K = 1024 words) 3SET 711 R12 8.70 - 711 R13 8.75 811/1011 R12 8.69 81 l/1011 R13 8.74 Sll/lOll R14 9.67 911 R12 8.57 911R13 8.66 911 R14 9.57 1011 R15 12.53 111 l/121 1 R12 6.66 1111/1211 R13 6.34 1111/1211 R14 6.99 . . 1111/12[...]

  • Страница 379

    68 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program Version Storage in K S Comments (1K = 1024 words) DLT 2 711 R9-13 0 - 811/1011 R9-14 0 911 R9-14 0 1111/1211 R9-14 0 PRETRANS 711 R8 0.33 711 R9 0.34 711 RlO-13 0.35 811 R8 0.33 811/1011 R9 0.34 81 l/1011 RlO-13 0.35 Sll/lOll R14-15 0.37 911 R8 0.33 911 RlO-13 [...]

  • Страница 380

    Memory calculations 69 Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program Version Storage in K S Comments (1K = 1024 words) Yl-DS 711 R8-13 O- 81 l/101 1 R8-14 0 911 R8-14 0 1111/1211 RS-14 0 ZPND SLST JPN DNIS 711 RlO-12 0.88 711 R13 81 l/101 1 RlO-12 0.90 0.88 81 l/101 1 R13-15 0.90 911 RlO-12 0.86 911 R13-14 0.88 111 l/121 1 RlO-1[...]

  • Страница 381

    70 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program Version Storage in K S Comments (1K = 1024 words) 3GD 711 RlO 11.21 _ 711 R12 11.51 711 R13 11.32 811/1011 RlO 11.21 Sll/lOll R12 11.51 811/1011 R13 11.32 811/1011 R14 11.33 911 RlO 11.09 911 R12 11.35 911 R13-14 11.22 1011 R15 11.54 1111/1211 RlO 8.90 1111/121[...]

  • Страница 382

    Memory calculations 71 Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program Version Storage in Ks Comments UK = 1024 words) MR 711 RlO 0.85 - 711 R12 0.85 711 R13 0.89 81 l/101 1 RlO 0.85 811/1011 R12 0.85 81 l/1011 R13-15 0.89 911 RlO 0.83 911 R12 0.84 911 R13-14 0.88 1111/1111 RlO-15 0.64 Awu 711 RlO 4.49 711 R12 4.57 711 R13 4.62 81[...]

  • Страница 383

    72 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program Version Storage in K S Comments (1K = 1024 words) 3PAO 711 RlO-13 0.05 - 811/1011 RlO-15 0.05 911 RlO-14 0.05 1111/1211 RlO-15 0.04 >LC 711 RlO-13 0.08 81 l/1011 RlO-15 0.08 911 RlO-14 0.08 1111/1211 RN-15 0.06 SLP 711 RlO 1.11 711 R12 1.17 711 R13 1.23 811/[...]

  • Страница 384

    Memory calculations 73 Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program Version Storage in K S Comments UK = 1024 words) ICDR 711 RlO-13 0 Sll/lOll RlO-15 0 911 RlO-14 0 1111/1211 RlO-15 0 APL-AUX 711 RlO 4.76 711 R12 4.77 711R13 5.06 811/1011 RlO 4.77 81 l/1011 R12 4.77 811/1011 R13 5.06 811/1011 R14-15 5.07 911 RlO 4.69 _. 911 R1[...]

  • Страница 385

    74 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program Version Storage in K S Comments (1K = 1024 words) NKL 81 l/1011 R12-15 0 . 911 R12-14 0 1111/1211 R12-15 0 ISA ISDN PRA 711 R12-13 0 Note 7 for R13 81 l/101 1 R12-14 0 911 R12-14 0 1111/1211 R12-14 0 - cnntinlml - g:. :..:::;a ,..? _’ . ! . .: ‘7 Memory cal[...]

  • Страница 386

    Memory calculations 75 Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program Version Storage in K S Comments (1K = 1024 words) IDC 711 R12 0.37 711 R13 0.39 811/1011 R12 0.38 811/1011 R13 0.39 81 l/101 1 R14-15 0.44 911 R12 0.37 911R13 0.38 911 R14 0.43 1111/1211 R12 0.20 1111/1211 R13 0.28 1111/1211 R14-15 0.31 AUX ACD-D 711 R13 0 . . [...]

  • Страница 387

    76 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program Version Storage in K S Comments (1K = 1024 words) FTC 711 R13 0 . 811/1011 R13-15 0 911 R13-14 0 1111/1211 R13-15 0 DT12 811/1011 R14 8.55 911 R14 8.43 1011 R15 8.57 1111/1211 R14 6.11 1111/1211 R15 6.12 JDMI 81 l/1011 R14-15 0 911 R14 0 1111/1211 R14-15 0 ISDN[...]

  • Страница 388

    Memory calculations 77 Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) PrOgGlIll Version Storage in K S Comm+ts (1K = 1024 words) NTWK SRVC 711 R13 Note 7- 811/1011 R13 3.57 811/1011 R14 3.97 911R13 ’ 3.51 911 R14 3.91 1011 R15 5.42 1111/1211 Rl? 2.56 1111/1211 R14 2.85 1111/1211 R15 3.89 DNXP 711 R13 0 811/1011 R13-15 0 911 R13-14 0 . [...]

  • Страница 389

    78 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program Version Storage in K S Comments (1K = 1024 words) ACNT Sll/lOll R14 0.61 _ 911 R14 0.60 1011 R15 0.62 111 l/121 1 R14 0.43 1111/1211 R15 0.44 ACD Account Package 7 11 R 13 0.61 81 l/101 1 R13-14 0.61 911 R13-14 0.60 1111/1211 R13-14 0.43 - continued - Memory ca[...]

  • Страница 390

    Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Memory calculations 79 Program Version Comments (1K = 1024 words) Storage in KS Total (base = resident + overlay area + firmware) . 711 R4 84.82 711 R5 87.96 711 R7 100.67 711 R8 104.41 711 R9 107.50 711 RlO 114.00 711R12 130.22 711 R13 141.05 811 R4 88.24 811 R5 93.31 811 R7 105.64 811 R8 1[...]

  • Страница 391

    80 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program Version Storage in KS Comments (1K No. of R/W Modules (base) (Note 2) . 711 1 (56k) 81 l/101 1 1 (56k) 911 1 (56k) 1111/1211 1 (56k) -continued - Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1[...]

  • Страница 392

    Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Memory calculations 81 Program Version Storage in Ks Comments (1K = 1024 words) Overflow (base) (Note 3) . 711 R4 28.82 711 R5 31.96 711 R7 44.67 711 R8 48.41 711 R9 51.50 711RlO 58.00 711 R12 74.22 711 R13 85.05 811 R4 32.94 811 R5 37.3 1 811 R7 . 49.64 811 R8 51.95 Sll/lOll R9 56.65 811/10[...]

  • Страница 393

    82 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program Version Storage in K S Comments (1K = 1024 words) Total of All Optional Packages (Note 4) - 711 R4 93.81 711 R5 100.26 711 R7 128.01 711 R8 142.29 711 R9 136.06 711 RlO 162.92 711 R12 174.29 711 R13 186.74 811 R4 93.92 811 R5 100.80 811 R7 127.37 811 R8 144.01 [...]

  • Страница 394

    Memory calculations 83 Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued). Program Version (1K = 1024 words) Storage in K S Comments Overflow (base + all optional packages). (Note 4) . 711 R4 122.63 711 R5 132.22 711 R7 172.68 711 R8 190.70 711 R9 187.56 711 RlO 220.92 711 R12 248.51 711 R13 271.79 811 R4 126.16 811 R5 138.11 811 R7 177.01 8[...]

  • Страница 395

    84 Memory calculations Table 3 Software program storage requirements (continued) Program Version Storage in K S Comments (1K = 1024 words) ROM 711 8.0 - 811/1011 8.0 911 8.0 1111/1211 8.0 I Note I : On XL and XN systems, Read/Write fiiware is represented by the set of High-Level intrinsics. Note 2 :Only 56K of the first program store is available. [...]

  • Страница 396

    Memow calculations 85 ..,... _.., -‘ I ‘, ,..-, : ;-:. : ,;: Table 4 Unprotected data storage requirements Feature Version Storage in Words Comments Fixed amount of storage required for system operation. . 711 R4 3748 711 R5 3983 711 R7 4386 711 R8-14 4397 811 R4 3751 811 R5 3986 811 R7 4386 811 R8 3398 811/1011 R9-15 4400 911 R4 5632 911 R5 58[...]

  • Страница 397

    86 Memory calculations Table 4 Unprotected data storage requirements (continued) Feature 2500 sets Version Storage in Words 711 R12-14 5.5 Comments 2500 Sets (CFW) SL-1 Sets (NDD) SL-1 Sets (ADD) 811/1011 R12-15 911 R12-14 1111/1211 R12-15 711 R4-7 711 R8-12 811 R4-7 811/1011 R8-12 911 R4-7 911 R8-12 111 l/121 1 R8-12 711 14.25 711 R13-14 16.25 811[...]

  • Страница 398

    Memory calculations 87 Table 4 Unprotected data storage requirements (continued) Feature Version Storage in Words Comments Add-on K/L Strips 711 10 811/1011 -10 I. 911 10 1111/1211 10 Data Service Access TNs 7 11 R8- 13 (Note 15) VMS Access ‘INS 811/1011 R8-15 911 R8-14 1111/1211 RS-15 -hlUkS 711 811/1011 911 111 l/121 1 R8-14 (Note 1) . Attendan[...]

  • Страница 399

    88 Memory calculations Table 4 Unprotected data storage requirements (continued) Feature Customers Version Storage in Words Comments 711 R4-7 137 711 R8-12 152 - 711 R13 142 711 R14 144 811 R4-7 137 811/1011 R8-12 152 811/1011 R13 142 811/1011 R14-15 144 911 R4-7 137 911 R8-12 152 911 R13 142 911 R14 192 111 l/121 1 R8-12 152 1111/1211 R13 142 111 [...]

  • Страница 400

    Memory calculations 89 Table 4 Unprotected data storage requirementstcontinued) Feature Version Storage in Words Comments Junctor Group Pairs 711 R4-14 0 (Note 3) 811 R4-7 .o .. 811/1011 R8-15 0 911 R4-14 74 1111/1211 R8-15 74 Peripheral Signaling 711 R4-14 36 811 R4-7 52 811/1011 R8-15 52 911 R4-14 52 1111/1211 R8-15 52 Secondary Tape 711 539154 1[...]

  • Страница 401

    90 Memory calculations Table 4 Unprotected data storage requirements (continued) Feature Conference Digitone Receiver Version 711 R4-9 711 RlO-14 811 R4-7 811/1011 R8-9 811/1011 RlO-15 911 R4-9 911 RlO--14 111 l/121 1 R8-9 1111/1211 RlO--15 711 811/1011 911 1111/1211 Storage in Words Comments 141 145 - 143 143 147 143 147 143 147 6 6 6 6 LPIB 711 4[...]

  • Страница 402

    Memory calculations 91 Table 4 Unprotected data storage requirements (continued) (Note 11) Feature Version Storage in Words Comments ACD 711 (Note 6) 811/1011 911 1111/1211 ACD Enhancement 711 Sll/lOll 911 1111/1211 Extended Agent Observe 711 811/1011 911 1111/1211 1 per ACD POS . . CMAC 711 534 811/1011 534 911 534 1111/1211 534 1 item --- NARS/BA[...]

  • Страница 403

    92 Memory calculations Table 4 Unprotected data storage requirements (continued) Feature Call Register Version Storage in Words Comments 711 R4 40 Wote 8) 711 R5 41 - 711 R7 44 711 RS-9 45 711 RlO-12 48 711 R13-14 61 811 R4 41 811 R5 42 811 R7 45 811/1011 R8-9 46 811/1011 RlO-12 49 811/1011 R13-14 62 911 R4 41 911 R5 42 911 R7 45 911 RS-9 46 911 Rl[...]

  • Страница 404

    Memory calculations 93 Table 4 Unprotected data storage requirements(continued) Feature Version Storage in Words Comments APL 711 179 1perAPLLink 811/1011 179 911 179 1111/1211 179 TDET 711 10 811 R4-5 10 811 R7 11 811/1011 R8-15 11 911 R4-5 10 911 R7-14 11 1111/1211 R8--15 11 DTI 711 811/1011 911 1111/1211 (Note 12) .. ATh4 - Schedule Blk 711 (Not[...]

  • Страница 405

    94 Memory calculations Table 4 Unprotected data storage requirements (continued) Feature Multi-Tenant Version 711 811/1011 911 1111/1211 Storage in Words 32 32 _ 32 32 Comments (Note 16) CSL 711 811/1011 911 1111/1211 - continued - Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1 . .[...]

  • Страница 406

    Memory calculations 95 Table 4 Unprotected data storage requirements (continued) Feature sl-I/DLI Loops Version 711 811/1011 911 1111/1211 Storage in Words Comments (Note 17) XJST 711 13 811/1011 13 911 13 1111/1211 13 BGD 711 60 711 R13-14 66 811/1011 60 811/1011 R13-15 66 . 911 60 911 R13-14 66 1111/1211 60 1111/1211 R13-15 66 BGD Disp 711 6x DNI[...]

  • Страница 407

    96 Memory calculations Table 4 Unprotected data storage requirements (continued) Feature Version Stnmw in Wnrdc rnmmentr ISDN PRA _ _ -_ _ __ 711 R12-14 811/1011 R12--15 911 R12-14 1111/1211 R12-14 uI.,- ..-., --- . . “_ -” V”ur..lr.1W # of DCHIS _ (Note 19). Overlay Data Space 711 R12-14 260 811/1011 R12-15 260 911 R12-14 260 1111/1211 R12-1[...]

  • Страница 408

    Memory calculations 97 Note I : The size of the trunk block is calhlated from: CT + X (words), where: CT = 7 words (3 average card block + 4 trunk timing block) X = (see the following table). Trunk Types Value of X NorXN Other RLA AUTOVON ADM Others 15 14 8 8 14 13 5 5 10 (Note) 10 (Note) Note: These numbers are for Release 12. Memory calculations [...]

  • Страница 409

    98 Memory calculations For Release 13 through 14, the size of the trunk block is calculated from: CT + X (words) + Y where: CT = 9 words (5 average card block + 4 trunk timing block) X = (see the following table) Y = 0 if the trunk belongs to a route which does not have CDR or which has CDR with dialed digits. = 9 if the trunk belongs to a route wh[...]

  • Страница 410

    Memory calculations 99 Note 4 : The size of the TI’Y blocks is calculated from: For Releases 4 and 5: 141+ x (words), where: x = 8 for CDR ‘ITYs; 128 otherwise. For Releases 7 through 15: t + x (words), where: t = 16 (size (ITYI@BLOCK) + 128 (TTY output buffer) = 144 and x = the following table CDR link: HS link: APL link: PMS Link: other: Inpu[...]

  • Страница 411

    100 Memory calculations Note 6 : For ACD features the following additional storage is required (total for system): (KOx[(K1xCROUT)+(K2xCPID)+(K3xCDN)+CTM+(K4x CRT)] ) + (K5 x CCUST) + (K6 x DN) + (K7 x PID) where the multiplication constants (Ki) are: KO=O KO=l K1=32 K1=32 @W K1=46 (R13-15) K2= 11 K2= 11 (Rw K2= 14 (Rl3-15) K2=22 K2=22 0712) K2=42 [...]

  • Страница 412

    Memory calculations 101 K3 =74 K3 =78 (R12-15) K4=25 size(U_ACD-BLOCK-EXTN) (=74) for RlO size (U-ACD-BLOCK-EXTN) (=78) K5=71 (R4-5) K5=79 (R7-10) K5=79 (Rw K5 = 114 (R13-15) K6=90 cR4-5) size (U-ACD-IOAREA) (*25) size (U-ACD-PRINT) (=15) + size (U-ACD-RTE-SYS) (=13) + size (U-ACD-SYS-QPOS) (=43) size (U-ACD-PRINT) (=15) + size (U-ACD-RTE-SYS) (=13[...]

  • Страница 413

    102 Memory calculations K7=29 size (U-AC&POS) (= 29) (Rl3-15) + 2 for DN Expansion + 1 for ACD-ACNT-CODE Kg=48 (Rl3) for NT, RT, and XT systems K8=48 (Rl4-15) for XT, and NT KS=32 (R13-15) for XN, and ST systems and the variables are represented by: CCUST = total no. of customers with ACD-C package CDN = total no. of ACD DNs for ACD-C customers[...]

  • Страница 414

    Memory calculations 103 Note 7 : The unprokcted data store requirements (on a per-customer basis) for NARS/BARS/CDP: 2x(8xRL+6xNCOS)Release4 2 x (12 x RL + 6 x NCOS) Releases 5-8 - 2 x (16 x RL + 6 x NCOS) Releases 9-12 If FCBQ & OHQ is equipped: 2x(11 xRL+ lOxNCOS)Release4 2 x (17 x RL + 10 x NCOS) Releases 5-8 2 x (21 x RL + i0 x NCOS) Releas[...]

  • Страница 415

    104 Memory calculations Note 8 : N, the recommended number of Call Registers is: N = (T + 815)/33.8 + M where: T=A/2xCx1.42-B. M = the number of ACD incoming trunks. A = the total voice loop traffic in CCS. B = M x l(1 is average CCS per ACD trunk). C = the total call register traffic factor The Total Call Register Traffic Factor is equal to 1 + an[...]

  • Страница 416

    Memory calculations 105 Assumptions: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) The peak day traffic = 1.42 x ABSBH traffic for business offices. All outgoing calls require authorization (worst case assumption). An additional call register is required for 20 s to hold the authorization code. 50% of outgoing calls use the charge account feature (worst case[...]

  • Страница 417

    106 Memory calculations (17) Music Trunk holding time is 30 s. (18) Average Call Park holding time is 1 min. (19) Average holding time for New Flexible Code Restriction is 4 s. (20) ESN Signalling Feature holding time is 15 s and 35% of calls need signalling feature. (21) The average IVMS call takes 8 s to dial, 15 s ringing, 10 s listening to gree[...]

  • Страница 418

    Memory calculations 107 Note 10 : IMS Unprotected Memory Reqtiirements Release 4: LINK Q TBL HDR = 1 word LINK OQ TBL = 16 words APL REQ TO SENDS = 1 word APL RDY TO SENDS = 1 word APL MONITOR S = 10 words APL MAINTENENCE S = 1 word APL PRINT MODE S = 1 word APL PRT MSG S = 1 word APL PRT PACK S = 1 word MSG MONITOR S = 1 word PACK MONITOR S = 1 wo[...]

  • Страница 419

    108 Memory calculations Releases 8 through 15: LINK QQ TBL = 16 words / APL LINK DATA = 179 words x N QUEUE DATA BLOCK = 4 words x N - N = # of APL links defined in CFN Block Total Unprotected (Releases 5 through 14) (16 + (182 x N)) words or (0.016 + 0.178 x N) K words N = # of APL links defined in CFN Block. Total Unprotected (Releasesl5) (16 + ([...]

  • Страница 420

    Memory calculations 109 = 66 (for 811 and 911 machines) + 9 = 75 ‘words = 63 (for all other machines) + 9 = 72 words. Note 13 : In Releases 7 through 15, there is no unprotect@ data store impact. Note 14 : Unprotected data store for digital set voice port: Releases 7 and 8 M2009 M2018 M2112 M2317 M3000 N/XN (words) Others (words) 25.25 24.25 35.2[...]

  • Страница 421

    110 Memory calculations Releases 9 through 12 M2009 N/XN (words) Others (words) 18.25 17.25 M2018 29.25 -28.25 M2112 20.25 19.25 M2317 36.25 35.25 M3000 46.25 45.25 Unprotected data store for digital set data ports. Note that data ports without digit class of service require one word less than those with digit display. Releases 13 through 15 M2009 [...]

  • Страница 422

    Memory calculations 11 I Releases 13 through 15 DS/VMS Access TN Preallocated Card 15 Otherwise 16.25 Where a preallocated card is one of the following shelf/cards: O/l - O/7, l/l - 1/8,2/l - 2/8, or 3/8 on a DLI loop. See Note 17. Note 16 : CSL Unprotected Data is comprised of: Per system (with CSL package, Release 8): CSL IQ HDRTBL + Queues = 3 +[...]

  • Страница 423

    112 Memory calculations Note 19 : Each DCHI consists of the following unprotected data blocks: 1. DCH U BLOCK = 43 words 44forR13andR14 _ 47 for R15 2. Output request buffers = 5 x # of OTBFs 3. Output buffer = 261 words 4. Input buffer = 261 words 5. Unprotected call reference table = 2 + M 6. Unprotected message link table = - 1 + M M is computed[...]

  • Страница 424

    Memory calculations 113 Note 21: One bit map table for TCAP per,system. Size of bit map (words)1/16 x number of CBS defined per system Traffic for TCAP4 words per Application ID (1) Note 22 : Bach DTI loop requires the following: DTI-UDATA-LPBLK 47 words DTI2-UDATA-CATD 9 words Note 23: Two words in the attendant unprotected data block per attendan[...]

  • Страница 425

    114 Memory calculations Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1[...]

  • Страница 426

    Table 5 Protected data storage requirements Memory calculations 115 Feature Version Storage in Words Comments Fixed amount of storage required for system operation. 711 R4 2981 711 R5 3077 711 R7 3253 711 R8 3249 711 R9-14 3250 811 R4 3109 811 R5 3148 811R7 3253 811 R8 3305 81 l/101 1 R9-14 3306 911 R4 3379 911 R5 3460 911 R7 3568 . 911 R8 3620 911[...]

  • Страница 427

    116 Memory calculations Table 5 Protected data storage requirements (continued) Feature Version Storage in Words Comments Add-on K/L strips 711 lO/rs 811/1011 lO/rs _ 911 lO/rs 1111/1211 lO/rs Data Service Access TNs 711 R8-14 (Note 29) VMS Access TNs 81 l/101 1 R8-15 911 R8-14 1111/1211 R8-15 remplate Head Table remplates 711 1 + # Templates 811/1[...]

  • Страница 428

    Table 5 Protected data storage requirements (continued) Memory calculations 117 Feature Attendants Version 711 811/1011 911 1111/1211 Storage in Words Comments (Note 3) Customers 711 R4 161 711 R5 166 711 R7 181 711 R8 203 711 R9 201 711 RlO 207 711 R12 211 811 R4 161 811 R5 166 811 R7 181 811 R8 203 811/1011 R9 201 Sll/lOll RlO 207 81 l/1011 R12 2[...]

  • Страница 429

    118 Memory calculations Table 5 Protected data storage requirements (continued) Feature Trunk Routes Version 711 R4 711 R5 711 R7-8 711 R9 711 RlO 711 R12 711 R13 811 R4 811 R5 811 R7-8 81 l/101 1 R9 81 l/1011 RlO 81 l/101 1 R12 81 l/1011 R13 911 R4 911 R5 911 R7-8 911 R9 911 RlO 911 R12 911 R13 1111/1211 R8 1111/1211 R9 1111/1211 RlO 1111/1211 R12[...]

  • Страница 430

    Memory calculations 119 Table 5 Protected data storage requirements (continued) Feature Peripheral Signaling Version Storage in Words Comments 711 30 1 item 811/1011 30 911 30 1111/1211 30 Vetwork Group 711 16 811 R4-7 32 81 l/101 1 R8-15 32 911 38 1111/1211 38 Vetwork-LOC 711 R4-5 68 711 R7-14 70 811 R4-5 68 . . 811 R7 70 811/1011 R14-15 70 911 R4[...]

  • Страница 431

    120 Memory calculations Table 5 Protected data storage requirements (continued) Feature MF Sender Conference Digitone Receiver Version 711 811/1011 911 1111/1211 711 811/1011 911 1111/1211 711 811/1011 911 1111/1211 Storage in Words Comments 2 2 _ 2 2 2 2 2 2 8 8 8 8 DN Translator 711 (Note 4) 811/1011 911 1111/1211 DIG Translator 711 (Note 5) 811/[...]

  • Страница 432

    Memory calculations 121 Table 5 Protected data storage requirements (continued) ---:... .i . . . . ,,, ,. ^ ,... -: . , ,_ _: Feature Version 711 81 l/101 1 911 1111/1211 Storage in Words Comments # SC Lists (Note 6) 3ASMain 711 811/1011 911 1111/1211 # Customers 3ASPemote 711 15 811/1011 15 911 15 1111/1211 15 # Customers . . BARS 711 811/1011 911[...]

  • Страница 433

    122 Memory calculations Table5 Protected data storage requirements(continued) Feature Version Storage in Words Comments CDP 711 # Customers 81 l/101 1 (Note.9) 911 1111/1211 ACD 711 811/1011 911 1111/1211 # Customers (Note 10) Group DND 711 81 l/101 1 911 1111/1211 # Customers (Note 11) DISA 711 811/1011 911 1111/1211 # Customers (Note 12) AUTH 711[...]

  • Страница 434

    Memory cakulations 123 Table 5 Protected data storage requirements (continued) IMS Feature Version 711 811/1011 911 1111/1211 Storage in Words Comments 370 1 list per 370 (Note 16) 370 370 NFCR 711 81 l/101 1 911 1111/1211 1 customer per (Note 17) Soft Memory 711 811/1011 911 1111/1211 35 35 35 35 1 item TDET 711 # TDET 81 l/101 1 911 1111/1211 DTI[...]

  • Страница 435

    124 Memory calculations Table 5 Protected data storage requirements (continued) Feature Multiple Office Code Screening Version 711 R4,7-14 811 R5-7 81 l/101 1 R8-15 911 1111/1211 Storage in Words Comments 1 per location code (if defined) (Note 20) M2009 Telephone 711 81 l/101 1 911 1111/1211 # telephones (Note 23) M2018 Telephone 711 811/1011 911 1[...]

  • Страница 436

    Memory calculations 125 Table 5 Protected data storage requirements (continued) Feature ATM Schedule Block Version 711 811/1011 911 1111/1211 Storage in Words Comments (Note 28) ATM Data Block 711 12 # ATh4 Routes 811/1011 12 911 12 1111/1211 12 DLI 711 811/1011 911 1111/1211 # DLI Loops (Note 18) . . ESDI 711 16+ Nx 7 N=#Ports 811/1011 16+ Nx 7 91[...]

  • Страница 437

    126 Memory calculations Table 5 Protected data storage requirements (continued) Feature VAS DSDN Version 711 811/1011 911 1111/1211 Storage in Words Comments # Customers (Note.30) CPND 711 811/1011 911 1111/1211 Per system (Note 32) LLC 711 5 81 l/101 1 5 911 5 1111/1211 5 Auxiliary Customer 711 187 81 l/101 1 187 911 187 1111/1211 187 # Customers [...]

  • Страница 438

    Memory calculations 127 Table 5 Protected data storage requirements (continued) Feature AWU Count Version Storage in Words 711 144 811/1011 144 911 144 1011 R15 288 1111/1211 144 1111/1211 R15 288 Comments ISL 711 R12-14 811/1011 R12-15 911 R12-14 1111/1211 R12-15 #DCHI (Note 37) ISDN PR12 711 81 l/101 1 911 1111/1211 #PRI2 (Note 33)s. ISDN PR12 71[...]

  • Страница 439

    128 Memory calculations No& I : The size of the protected line block for PBX telephones is determined from the following: Basic Line Block 4 words Release 4 5 words Releases 5 through 9 6 words in Release JO Basic Line Block (ODAS) Card Block Component 7 words in Releases 12 through 15 7 words Releases 4 and 5 8 words Releases 7 through 12 10 w[...]

  • Страница 440

    Memory calculations 129 In addition to the basic line block, each feature requires extra data space as follows: Feature FM-5 R7-12 R13 R14-15 Associate Set - 2 words 2 words 2 words Automatic Wake-Up 1 word 1 word 1 word Call Forward Key (4-24 digits) l-6 words l-6 words l-6 words Call Forward by Call 2 words 2 words 2 words Type Call Party Name Di[...]

  • Страница 441

    130 Memory calculations Feature Enhanced Hot Line (l-31 digits) Last Number Redial (3-32 digits) (4-32 digits) Manual Line Message Center DN Message Registration Pretranslation Enhancement R46 R7-12 R13 R14-15 2-l 0 words (Rl O- 2-10 words . 2-10 words 12) 1 word (R8) 1 word l-8 words (R9-10) l-8 words l-8 words - 1 word 2 words 2 words - 1 word 2 [...]

  • Страница 442

    Memory calculations 131 Feature Stored Number Redial (4-32 digits) System Speed Call User I Tenant Number R46 R7-12 R13 R14-15 l-8 words l-8 words l-8 wqrds 1-b words - 1 word 1 word 1 word - 1 word 1 word 1 word Note 2 : The size of the protected line block for SL-1 telephones is determined from the following: Basic Line Block 7 words in Release 4[...]

  • Страница 443

    132 Memory calculations In addition to the basic line block requirement, each feahue requires extra data space as follows: Feature R4-5 R7-12 R13 R14-15 ACD Agent Key 1 word 1 word 1 word - 1 word ACD Display Queue Key 1 word 1 word 2 words 2 words ACD Interflow Key 1 word 1 word 2 words 2 words ACD IN-CALLS key 9 words 11 words 11 words 11 words A[...]

  • Страница 444

    : ..z:... j ;. .,._. ,y, I? ;. -:-: -: :.:‘-;: ,:. ‘,’ Memory calculations 133 Feature CFNA DN R46 1 word R7-12 1 word R13 2 words R14-15 2 words Conference Autodial l-6 words Conference Hotline 3-l 0 words Conference Speed Call DIG Key DN Key EFD/EHT DN 1 word 1 word .’ word word 1 word 1 word 1 word 2 words 2 words I. Flash Call Key 1 w[...]

  • Страница 445

    134 Memory calculations Feature Last Number Redial (4-32 digits) Message Center DN Message Registration Park Key Pretranslation Enhancement Priority Call Key Private Line Key m-5 R7-12 R13 R14-15 1 word (R8) 1 word l-8 words l-8 words (R9-12) 1 word 2 words 2 words 1 word (RlO) 1 word 1 word 1 word 1 word 1 word 1 word l/2 word (for 255 calling gro[...]

  • Страница 446

    Memory calculations 135 I Feature R45 R7-12 R13 R14-15 Speed Call User Stored Number Redial Key 1 word 1 word 1 word (4-32 digits) Tenant Number Time and Date Key Voice Call Key l-8 words l-8 words 1-8 words l-8 words 1 word 1 word 1 word 1 word 1 word 1 word 1 word 1 word 2 words 2 words ._ Note 3 : The size of the protected line block for attenda[...]

  • Страница 447

    136 Memory calculations In addition to the basic linebloclc, each fea@re requires extra data space as follows: Feature Requirements Autodial Key 8 words 6 words in Releases 7-15) Flash Call Key 1 word (R8-12) Flash Override Call Key 1 word Group DND Key 1 word Immediate Call Key 1 word Paging Key 1 word 2 words in Releases 13-l 5 Priority Call Key [...]

  • Страница 448

    :I ., _. :...: _ -j ::;;:..i.::.. ; ..; :,,, .‘; Memory calculations 137 Note 4 : Prior to Rekase 13, the memory requirements for the D&tory Number Translator are (in words of protected data store): (2xS)+AS+12x(l+ Nl+N2+N3) +ADx(~+AIx~)+(DDx~)+SPDN + number of listed DN + 1 per defined DN + 16 (+ 64 withReleases 8and9) (+ 65 with Release 10)[...]

  • Страница 449

    138 Memory calculations where: S = number of different DN appearing on SL- 1 telephones, 500/2500 telephones mixed with SL- 1 telephones, and private line 500/2500 telephones - AS = number of appearance of DN within S Nl = number of different first digit in the numbering plan N2 = number of different sequence of the fast two digits in the numbering[...]

  • Страница 450

    Memory calculations 139 Note 5 : The protected data store requirements for the Dial Intercom feature for each customer using the package are as follows: l+ Gx (l+ 2x M) where: G = number of groups M = number of members in each group Release 14 through 15: (n + 1) + (x x (2 + (~~21) 1 where: n = maximum number of dial intercom groups in Overlay 15 x[...]

  • Страница 451

    140 Memory calculations Speed Call Quick Reference Chart List Size DN Size 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 31 1 6 7 8 9 10 Ii 12 13 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 10 15 25 35 45 55 65 75 85 20 25 45 65 85 105 125 145 165 25 30 55 80 105 130 155 180 205 30 35 65 95 125 155 185 215 245 40 45 85 125 165 205 245 290 326 50 55 105 155 205 255 310 360 406 60 65 125 185 24[...]

  • Страница 452

    Memory calculations 141 Note 7 : The protected data store requirements for BARS (on a per- customer basis) are: Release 4 137 + 2.73 x (HNPA + NPA) + 2.73 x (1HNF’A + 1NF’A) + RLx(8+ 3xRLE)+ DMEx(3+ I/4)+ FCAS Releases 5 and 7 137 + 2.73 x (HNF’A + NPA) + 2.73 x (1HNF’A + INPA) + RLx(8+ 3x:RLE)+ DMEx(3+ I/4) + FCAS+ SDRRx(3+ 2xSDE)+ ITGE Re[...]

  • Страница 453

    142 Memory calculations I= NPA= lHNPA= 1NPA = R= RL= RLE= DME= FCAS = where: SDRR = SDE = ITGE = the average number .of digits that must be inserted as part of digit manipulation number of NPA (area codes) in the North American dialing plan number of 1 + NXX in the home NPA of the SL-1 number of 1 + NPA (area codes) in the North American dialing pl[...]

  • Страница 454

    Memory calculations 143 129 + 305 = 434 SIZE (ESNJ’RAN-BLOCK) = 1 I This formula is based on the assumption that the IWA/NXX translation tree is half full and distributed evenly. This should represent the typical case. For more precise calculation, use NABS formula. . Note 8 : The protected data store requirements for NABS (on a per- customer bas[...]

  • Страница 455

    144 Memory calculations where: SuIvll = suM2= SUM= II= Al= A2= A3= A4= Bl = number of different first digit in network translator 2. B2= number of different sequence of the first two digits in the non l+ number in network translator 2. B3 = B4= R= RL= RLE= DME= (SUM of network translator 1) (SUM of network translator 2) [(lOxR)xxn] -1 11 x ________[...]

  • Страница 456

    Memory calculations 145 I= the average number. of digits that must be inserted as part of digit manipulation. LGC= number of on-net or virtual locations. FCAS = (N + 1) + N(M + 1) + MN[ 4 + (1OOP + 15j/16] where: N = the number of defined FCAS tables M = the average number of NPA codes per table P = the average number of first digit of NXX codes se[...]

  • Страница 457

    146 Memory calculations Note 9 : Prior to Release 13, the protected data store requirements for CDP (on a per-customer basis) are: 137+SCx2+RLx(8+3xRLE)+DMEx(3+1/4) Releases 13 through 15 where: SC= number of steering codes RL= the number of route lists RLE= the average number of route lists entries per route list DME= the number of distinct digit [...]

  • Страница 458

    Memory calculations 147 Note 10 : The ACD-feature requires.the following additional data store (total for system): For ACD-C not equipped (K~xDN)+(K~xPID)+AID+(K~xCUST) . Simplified (46xDN)+ (12xPID)+ AID+ (3xCUST) For ACD-C equipped [Kl + (K2 x CCUST)] + (K3 x DN) + (K4 x PID) + AID + (K5 x CUST) Simplified [25 + (8 x CCUST)] + (46 x DN) + (12 x P[...]

  • Страница 459

    148 Memoty calculations K3=57 (R13-14) size (PLACD-BLOCK), (40) + pointer to block from the ACD List (=l) + word offset (ACD-PQS-TN) (=16). K4= 12 size (I-ACD-KEY-DATA) (=l 1) + store for ACD-POS-TN (=l). K4= 14 (Rl3-14) K5=3 size (P-ACD-KEY-DATA) (= 13) + store for ACD-POS-TN (=l). header (ACD-LIST) (=l) + header (ACD-AGENT-ID-TBL) (=2). and the v[...]

  • Страница 460

    Memory calculations 149 No& 12 : The protehd store requirements for DISA (on a per-customer basis) are: l+(DNx6) Release 13 through 15 l+(DNx7)-----l+(DNx7) where: DN = number of DISA-DNs. Note 13 : The protected store requirements for Authorization Code (on a per-customer basis) are: 1250 + (A x ((L/4 x 128) + 64)) + (I3 x (1018 + (C x 32))) R[...]

  • Страница 461

    150 Memory calculations Note 14 : History file buffeican be 1-64K.per customer option. Note 15 : For System Speed Call List (XL) Head Table: 3 + NB/4 + NB (round NB/4 up) NB (no. of blocks) = EL/EB (round any remainder up) where: EL = entries per list (given), EB = entries per block, 256/?VE (round up remainder) where: WE = words per entry, DNS/4 ([...]

  • Страница 462

    Memory calculations 151 Note 17: New Fletible Code Restriction (NFCR) requires the following memory requirements: 1) A 129 word block that contains: (a) A 128 word table that contains the pointers to the.FRL block for each route. (b) A pointer to the tree root address table. 2) A table that contains the pointers to the NFCR trees. Its length is def[...]

  • Страница 463

    152 Memory calculations Note 28 : DTI/DLI Protect&l Data Store requirements: Releases 4 and 5 PDD-BLOCK = 12 words PAD-TABLE = 36 words MISCELLANEOUS = 2 words TOTAL= 50 words Release 7 = PDD-BLOCK + (N x PADTI-TSETBLOCK) + (T x local network d-1 =18+ (Nx lO)+ (TX 70) Releases 8 through 15 = PDD-BLOCK + (N x PDTI-TSET-BLOCK) + (T + L) x local n[...]

  • Страница 464

    Memory calculations 153 Note 20 : The size of the protected multiple office code screening line block is determined from the following: 2 words for each NXX code defined 2 words for each range defined (maximum_ 20 ranges perlocation code - 80 words pds). Note 21 : Templates are incremented in blocks of 10 words. Note 22 : The trunk block size is 11[...]

  • Страница 465

    154 Memory calculations Note 25 : Requirements foi voice/data port-are the same as an SL- 1 basic telephone (Note 2) except the key layout portion of the template requires: Before Release 9: (34 + # of non-key features)/# of telephones shariqg the same teniplate. After Release 9: (21+ # of non-key features)/# of telephones sharing the same template[...]

  • Страница 466

    Memory calculations 155 Note 27 : Protected-data store required by .the Multi-Tenant Service feature includes the following: 1028 words per customer that enables Tenant Service for: Releases 4,s and 7: = size (P_TENANTJTRS) (=644) + size (TEN-CPG-ORDLS) (=256) + size (RTE-CPG-ORDLS) (= 64) + size (CPG-DEFS) (= 64) Releases 8-14: = size (PmTENANT-FT[...]

  • Страница 467

    156 Memory calculations Note 28 : Protected data store requirements for ATM schedule block are as follows: Releases 4,s and 7: 24+((9xNC+l)xNH) Releases S-15: 24+((9xNC+ l)xNH)+ 13xAR where: NC = Number of Customers. NH = Number of hours to be scheduled. AR = Number of routes to be tested. . . Note 29 : For all machine types, the additional protect[...]

  • Страница 468

    Memory calculations 157 Note 30 : The protected data store requirement (in words) for VAS Data Services per customer, for each customer that has at least one DSDN, is: = DSDN-VASJBL + (DSDN-LIST x N) 16+ (39 + N) where: N = the number of VAS for which at least one DSDN is defined. Releases 10 and 12 = DSDN-VAS-TRL + (DSDN LIST x N) 16+ (248 x N) Re[...]

  • Страница 469

    158 Memory calculations Note 32 : Protected data stdre requirements for CPND per system in words is: where: C = number of customers SL = number of non-PBX DNs with or without name defined (including trunk routes, ACD ATIN, and SL- 1) SP = number of single appearance PBX DNs with name defined DIG = number of DIG Groups * = 101 for 2-digit DIG Groups[...]

  • Страница 470

    Memory calculations 159 Note 34 : Each system that has DCHIs shares P-DCH-TBL which has 16 words in length. Each DCHI consists of the following protected data blocks: P-DCHBLOCK = 23 words Releases 13 and 14: P-DCH-BLOCK = 25 words Release 15: PDCH-BLOCK = 26 words Protected call reference table = 1 + (24 x # of PRI loops controlled by DCHI). If DC[...]

  • Страница 471

    160 Memory calculations A data block of 64 words is allocated for each customer if at least one route is defined to have SID. The structure mapping onto this data block is ISA-SID-RT-LIST. Note 37 : Protected ISL Trunk TN table = l+ maximum number of ISL Trunks defined. Note 38 : The protected customer data per customer defined is as follows: B+(Xx[...]

  • Страница 472

    Memory calculations 161 Note 41 : The protected data store requirements for DTI2 is as follows: DTI2-SYSTEM-DATA 9 words DTI2-SCAT-NT 16 words DTI2-SCTA 16 words DTI2-FCADA-NT 16 words - DTI2J’CADA 16 words Note 42 : There are 32 pointers to FTC protected structures. Each FTC table has 90 words Note 43 : There are 256 pointers to EFTC protected s[...]

  • Страница 473

    162 Memory calculations Note 45 : EOW requires the following inRelease 15: per target table 113 words per source table 174 words per ACD DN 6 words The words required for the source table are allocated for every target ACD DN. Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1[...]

  • Страница 474

    AAB ACDA ACDB ACDC ACDD ACDR AIOD AMP Attendant Administration Automatic Answerback ACD Basic ACD Advanced ACD Management Reoprts ACD Auxiliary data System AUTOVON CDR Automatic Identification od Inward Dial Automated Modem Pooling Automatic Number IdentificationANI Route Selection Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1 L’[...]

  • Страница 475

    164 List of terms ANIR AOP I ATVN / AUTH AWU BACD BARS BAUT BCSOB BGD BQUE BRTE CAB CAS ANl Route Selection Attendant Overflow Position AUTOVON Authorization code Automatic Wakeup Automatic Call Distribution-Base Basic Automatic Route Selection Basic Authorixation Code SL- 1 Output Buffer Background Terminal Facility Basic Queuing Basic Routing Cha[...]

  • Страница 476

    List of terms 165 CASM CASR CCBQ CCBQCM CDP CDR CDRE CDRQ CFCT CFNA2 CHG CLNK CMAC CPND CAS Main CAS Remote Coordinated Call Back Queuing Coordinated Call Back Queuing to Conventional Mains Coordinated Dialing Plan Call Detail Recording CDR Expansion Emergency Acces Enhancement (911 Option) Call Forward by Call Type Call Fortward No Answer - Second[...]

  • Страница 477

    166 List of terms CPRK CTY 1 ! CUST DDSP DHLD DI DISA DLDN DND DNDG DNDI DNIS DNXP DRNG Call Park CDR TIT Multi-Customer Digit Display SL- 1 Set Deluxe Hold Dial Intercom Direct System Inward Access Departmental LDN Do Not Disturb DND Group DND Individual Dial Number Identification Service Directory Number Expansion Distinctive Ringing Memory calcu[...]

  • Страница 478

    List of terms 167 DSET DTI EES EOVF FCA FCBQ FTC GRP HIST HOT IAP3P ICDR IDC IMS Digital Set M2000 Digital Trunk Interface END-to-End Signaling EWnhanced Overflow (NACD) Forced Charge Account Flexible Call Back Queuing Flexible Tone and Digit Switch Control Groupe Call History File Hot Line Services Enhanced Hot Line Flexible Hot Line Integrated Se[...]

  • Страница 479

    168 List of terms INTR ISA ISDN ISL IVMS LLC LMAN LNK LSEL MCBQ MCT MOD MOH MR Intercept Integrated Services Access Integrated Services Digital Network Integrated Services Digital Network Integrated Services Digital Network Signaling Link Integrated Voice Messaging System Line Load Control ACD Load Management Auxiliary Processor Link Line Selection[...]

  • Страница 480

    List of terms 169 MSB MUS MWC NARS NAUT NCOS NFCR NSC NSIG NTRF NTWK NXFER occ ODAS Make Set Busy Music on Hold Message Center Network Automatic Route Selection Network Authorization Code Network Class of Service New Flexible Code Restriction Network Speed Calling Network Signaling Network Traffic Network Ring Again Network Transfer Other Common Ca[...]

  • Страница 481

    170 List of terms OHQ OPAO OPTF PBXI PBXOB PMSI PQUE PRA RAN RESDB RMS ROA RPE see Off Hook Queuing Out-pulsing of Asterisk and Octothorpe Advanced Features PBX Interface/Digital Trunk Interface Non SL-1 Output Buffer Property Management system Interface Priority Queuing Primary Rate Access Recorded Announcement Resident Debug Room Status Service R[...]

  • Страница 482

    List of.terms 171 SCI SLP SNR SR ssc ss5 SS25 TAD TDET TENS TOF TSET UMG UST Station Category Indication Station Loop Preemption Stored Number Redial Set Relocation System Speed Call 500 Set Access to 2500 Set Features 2500 Set Features Time and Date Tone Detector Multi Tenant Services Time Overflow Queuing Digital Set M3000 (Touchphone) User-to-Us[...]

  • Страница 483

    172 List of terms Memory calc&tions 553-2201-151 Appendix 1 -. ‘2[...]

  • Страница 484

    List of terms 173 Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1 -[...]

  • Страница 485

    SL-1 Generic Xl 1 Memory calculations Q 1984 Northern Telecom All rights reserved. Information subject to change without notice. Release 1 .O Standard December 1989 Printed in U.S.A.[...]

  • Страница 486

    SL-1 System options 21,51-, 61,71 Power engineering Standard[...]

  • Страница 487

    [...]

  • Страница 488

    SL-1 System options 21,51,61,71 Power engineering Publication number: 553-3001-l 52 Document status: Standard Document release: 1 .O Date: January 29,199O . . . -,.:..,-.. 0 1990 Northern Telecom All rights reserved. Power engineering 553-3001-l 52[...]

  • Страница 489

    Revision history January 29,199O Standard, release 1 .O Power engineering 553-3001-152[...]

  • Страница 490

    . . . III About this document This document describes the SL-1 System power and grounding architecture for both AC and DC systems and provides guidelines for calculating system power consumption as well as reserve power requirements. References For information about the power plant used with DC-powered system option 7 1, see the following publicati[...]

  • Страница 491

    iv About this document See the SL-I installation a&f maintenance guide for - System installation procedures (553-3001-210) - Circuit pack installation and testing (553-3001-211) - Installation procedures for telephone sets and attendant consoles (553-2201-215) - - Extended systems installation (553-3001-250) - Disk drive upgrade procedures (553[...]

  • Страница 492

    Contents SL-1 system power overview 1 General information 1 AC or DC powering 2 AC power system description Input power specifications Internal power distribution External power distribution and ground connections General notes for AC figures 5 . 5 6 11 13 DC power system description 19 Input power specifications 19 Internal power distribution 20 E[...]

  • Страница 493

    vi Contents Reserve power 47 AC reserve power 47 DC reserve power 53 Engineering and configuration guidelines 57 AC power architecture 56 Internal AC power equipment components 56 DC power architecture 61 internal DC power equipment components 62 External DC Power equipment components 63 Commercial power and grounding requirements 66 Power conducto[...]

  • Страница 494

    SL-1 system power overview The SL-1 system is an advanced telecommunications system providing state of the art functionality to the customer. The associated power system provides the necessary power for system operation. General information The power system required by the SL- 1 system can be divided into two main categories: external and internal.[...]

  • Страница 495

    2 SL-1 system power overview In discussing these powering schemes, unless otherwise specified, AC distribution will mean a single phase circuit without a neutral conductor, but with an accompanying green wire ground conductor. The nominal voltage is assumed to be either 208 or 240 volts but any voltage within the range shown in Table 1 is applicabl[...]

  • Страница 496

    SL-1 system power overview 3 Figure 1 AC powered system , Figure 1 AC powered system I M Required I Chtionnl Figure 2 DC powered system AC b input I m Required Power engineering 553-3001-152[...]

  • Страница 497

    4 SL-1 system power overview Power engineering 553-3001-l 52 -.[...]

  • Страница 498

    :i ,. ../ :.: :.:- 3: :.: : ,._. _... _ .; “.f. .;::‘r,> --,., 5 AC power system description This section describes the characteristics of the Meridian SL-1 system where equipment columns are directly powered by commercial power. The commercial power voltage is brought directly into the Pedestal Power Distribution Unit. From there it is pass[...]

  • Страница 499

    6 AC power system description Table 2 Transient tolerance Transient tolerance Amplitude Duration (See note) Surges 288 U ac 8.34 mS to 50 ms 276 U ac 50 mS to 500 ms Sags 146Uac 8.34 mS to 50 ms 166Uac 50 mS to 500 ms Spikes 815 Upk ~4.17 ms 815 U pk to ‘408 U pk 4.17 to 8.3 ms Notches to ou ~4.17 mS OUto206U 4.17 mS to 8.3 ms Note: All transient[...]

  • Страница 500

    AC power system description 7 Figure 3 AC internal power distribution Module - PDU . Module to Module Harness / / Field Wiring Terminal Block SY:. Mon.? Wr.Sup. . . Power engineering 553-3001-152[...]

  • Страница 501

    8 AC power system description Pedestal Power Distribution Unit (PDU) The Pedestal PDU provides the following: - The Field Wiring Terminal Block provides a connection point for the external wiring that is brought into the Pedestal. - The EM1 Filter provides filtering of the wires connecting back to the Utility in order to meet FCC and DOC requiremen[...]

  • Страница 502

    NTBWGAA output v Output A +5.1 v 28 A +8.5 V 4.0 A +lO v 0.5 A -lov 0.5 A +15 v 17A -15 v 15 A -48V 7.7 A ; . . . :: y.:::..: .,., ‘:-; ,2:-j;. i AC power system description 9 Module to Backplane Harness The Module to Backplane Harness provides the power to the AC Power Supplies through the backplane power connector. AC Power Supplies There are t[...]

  • Страница 503

    10 AC power system description Table 4 Common Equipment Power Supply NT8D29AA output v output A +5.1 V 60A +12v 2.5 A -12 v l.OA Table 5 Ringing Generator NT8021 AA Output VNA Output F 70 V ac/8 VA 25150 Hz 80 V acl8 VA 25150 Hz 06Vaxf6VA 20125 Hz output v Output A - 150v 0.200 A Power engineering 553-3001-152 . .[...]

  • Страница 504

    AC power system description 11 Table 6 Common/Peripheral Equipment Pow& Supply Nl7D14AA output v OuJput A +5.1 V 60A +8.5 V 2.5 A +12 l.OA -12 0.75 A +15v 10A -15 v IOA -48 V 4.75 A -150 v 0.13 A output VIVA Output F 86Vacf5VA 20 Hz External power distribution and ground connections .-_ The external distribution for AC powered systems is very s[...]

  • Страница 505

    12 AC power system description Figure 4 Grounding and equalizing nodes -----H--s------- -----H--s------- 9 9 1 1 Building ground Building ground EaZh EaZh rod rod hems: 1. An equalizing node for the Meridian SL-1 system may be obtained through the ACEG the AC panel. ff isolation as per NEC 384-127 (exception 1) cannot be provided, an alternate low [...]

  • Страница 506

    ,: ,, .., c. i...., ::, .. ..!, ;:;:: :.-I :I :, ,“:-:-‘; AC power system description 13 General notes for AC figures Permanent connection to Branch Circuit When conduit or a raceway is used it should be metal and regardless of the type, it must contain an insulated ground wire (green), 6 AWG or larger. Cord connection to Branch Circuit A separ[...]

  • Страница 507

    14 AC power system description Note: This single point equalizing is reqmred because communication between modules that are not in the same physical line-up would put small amounts of DC on the AC (green wire) ground. Likewise residual AC voltages would be superimposed (longitudinally) on the logic. There /: -- is a only a few volts of common mode [...]

  • Страница 508

    AC power system description 15 Multi-column AC powered system A multi-column system (with one or more columns physically adjacent to each other) can be powered as shown in Figure 6. Figure 6 Multi-column distribution cord or conduit AC in AC service panel . 120v receptacle- ’ ! ACEG receptacles Note 1: This LRE may be a simple insulated connector[...]

  • Страница 509

    16 AC power system description Multi-row AC powered system A multi-row system (with several rows of one or more columns physically adjacent to each other) can be powered as shown in Figure 7. ! Figure 7 Multi-row distribution SL-1 System PE JUNCT CPU . . SL-1 System PE PE Power engineering 553-3001-l 52[...]

  • Страница 510

    AC power system description 17 Extended systems - A typical large extended system with both new and existing equipment is . . . . . .:. L ‘...’ : .‘.* shown in Figure 8. _,. , ..: ” p.: y..y+;‘j . ..y-,-*.r, ..~...‘:;; Figure 8 External distribution for AC systems SL-1 System AC in III II Note -1 E iX istir H Note 3 + +- Battery plant [...]

  • Страница 511

    18 AC power system description -.- --- ,._ ._ r.- . . . i; . . . .I Power engineering 553-3001-152 . . ,[...]

  • Страница 512

    DC power system description 19 This section outlines the characteristics and requirements for the DC auxiliary power that the system is connected to. Input power specifications The DC supply chosen must accect the calculated current drain and operate within the following specifications: I. Table 7 input specifications I Input Maximum range Expected[...]

  • Страница 513

    20 DC power system description Internal power distribution Figure 9 shows the internal DC power distribution elements: - Pedestal Power Distribution Unit (PDU) - Module to Module Harness - Module to Backplane Harness - DC Power Converters The power cables enter the Pedestal and connect to an internal terminal block located in the pedestal. From the[...]

  • Страница 514

    .: . . ..-.:. :/ --.. > ; : ; : ::...: ..,. Ii : ,,.‘/ DC power system description 21 Figure 9 DC internal power distribution I Top Cap I Module to > Module Internal Field Wiring Terminal Y FGND Block Power engineering 553-3001-l 52 . .[...]

  • Страница 515

    22 DC power system description Module to Module Harness The Module to Module Harness provides the following: - The Module Feed provides the independent power feed to the Modules above itself. - The Module Harness Feed provides the power feed to the Module backplane Harness. Module to Backplane Harness The Module to Backplane Harness provides the po[...]

  • Страница 516

    DC power system description 23 The output voltages and currents of the power converters are listed in Tables 8 through 11. Table 8 Peripheral Equipment Converter I Output v +5.1 v +8.5 V +lO v -10 v +15 v -15 v -48v NT6D4OAA Output A 28A 4.0 A 0.5 A 0.5 A 17A l5A 7.7 A Table 9 Common Equipment Converter I NT6D41 AA output v Output A +5.1 v 60 A +12[...]

  • Страница 517

    24 DC power system description Table 10 Ringing Generator Nl7W3AA Output VNA Output. F 70 V act1 6 VA 20/25/50 Hz 80 V acfl6 VA 20/25/50 Hz 86 V at/l 6 VA 20/25/50 Hz output v output A -150 v 0.200 A Table 11 Common/Peripheral Equipment Converter output v +5.1 v +8.5 V Nl7DO4AA output A 5aA 2.5 A +12 l.OA -12 0.75 A +15 v 1OA -15 v 1OA -48V 4.75 A [...]

  • Страница 518

    DC power system description 25 External power distributioh and grounckonnections The power plants shown in the following ‘figures are typical but there are many variations possible for the item labeled “Rect/Dist” It could be existing customer equipment or a system that Northern Telecom either supplies or recommends. In any case, the rectifie[...]

  • Страница 519

    26 DC power system description Single Point Ground (SPG) and Isolated Ground Bus (lGB) The SPG in this grounding scheme is the AC Equipment Grounding bar in the AC distribution panel (ACEG). If this bar is insulated from the distribution panel, as is recommended, then it is referred to as an IGB. In the following figures, the preferred methods for [...]

  • Страница 520

    . . . . : . ._.- . ,-“., ‘. c; ; ,,~ .._:.:. ,~,: ,’ DC power system description 27 Figure 10 Multi-column distribution with NT6D52 and ‘QBLl5 AC in NT7Di 2 rack EJofe 1: This is a 3 conductor cable enclosed in conduit. BR(+) and LR go to the positive bus bar in the QBL15; BAT (-) connects to the appropriate fuse in the QBL15. hlofe 2: May [...]

  • Страница 521

    28 DC power system description Figure 11 Multi-column distribution with QCA13 A( AC service panel SL-1 System > in :.:.:.:.:.:~<:~ y ::$c?~::~.:~& :$$$$ggg :: . . . . .,.,.......,:, 2‘ ,,:,. y ;;;$@ # . . . . . . . . . . :*.:.: . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,: .:. ,_ y :~&*:+x ~ $j$g$p$ 120” . re-pt=ies : :j:i-:i:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.: :::[...]

  • Страница 522

    DC Power system description 29 Figure 12 Multi-column distribution with QBLl2 customer power SL-1 System AC in .A...... . . . . . . . . . . . :. . . . . . . . . < A.... , . ..A . . . .:. . . . . . . . y 7 AC service fjanel . . . I 120v receptacle+ ACEG 4 AC conduit Customer: Rectifier/Battery plant Note 1: This is a 3 conductor cable endosed in [...]

  • Страница 523

    30 DC power system description Figure 13 Extended systems SL-1 System 120v ’ m receptacles W AC service rianel T ,.-a- 7 ACFr, -1 Note 1 -tIIIII X-1 I ~~ BR/LRE (Ground - ] window) F a 11111 FiAWr, 11 -RecVDist cabinet (WA1 3) Note 1: This is a 3 conductor cable enclosed in conduit. BR(+) and LR go to LRE; BAT(-) connects to the appropriate dist[...]

  • Страница 524

    31 System grounding Proper grounding is essential to system operation. The SL-1 system requires a single-point ground. Proper grounding is required for trouble-free operation and for the safety of personnel. The DC resistance of the conductor joining the SL-1 system system ground reference to the main building ground should be as close to zero as p[...]

  • Страница 525

    32 System grounding - Single Point Ground This system does not, by design, require an isolated AC ground (IG) system (although local codes may require it). The system does require a single point ground (SPG) system. The SPG is needed because several conductors are used as returns. These include battery returns (BR) and logic returns (LR). Logic ret[...]

  • Страница 526

    System grounding 33 like ground system with local ground references like the LRE and ACIG coming together at a main ground window, while small systems tend to use a ground bar or plate for several purposes and it ends up taking on the name of it’s primary function. Additional requirements The following must also be observed to implement the singl[...]

  • Страница 527

    34 System grounding Non-isolated ground topology In a non isolated system the AC equipment ground (ACEG) connects to the metal panel, and the associated conduit may also contact various structural metal. This ground alone is not adequate for the SL-1 system. A true SPG system will not be possible, but a dedicated ground conductor which connects to [...]

  • Страница 528

    Operating power requirements Introduction This section contains: - power consumption data for both circuit packs and full modules - guidelines and methods to help you determine total system power requirements, for both AC and DC systems I. Circuit pack power consumption The power consumption of all currently-supported peripheral equipment circuit c[...]

  • Страница 529

    36 Operating power requirements Table 12 NTBD37 Intelligent peripheral equipment’powe; consumption Circuit pack NT8DOl AC Controller-4 NT8DOlAD Controller-2 NTBD02AA Digital LC NT8D03AA Analog LC NT8DOSAA Analog/t&g Waiting LC NT8Dl4AA Universal Trunk NT8D15AA E&M Trunk NTBD16AA Digitone Receiver Typical power (Watts) 32 32 28 20 20 36 34[...]

  • Страница 530

    i Operating power requirements 37 i ‘i .:: .-::< . . , :.. i... i _. ..~.. .__, ,. ,~. .“. _I ! . . .;.. .L. 1 , , . : ::.:. ..:, Module power consumption The typical and worst case power consumption data for each fully configured module are shown in Table 14. The “typical power” data is generally adequate for use in .system power engine[...]

  • Страница 531

    38 Operating power requirements System power calculation guidelines The SL- 1 system was designed so that there would be no restrictions as a result of power or thermal limitations. In other words, any card can go in any slot, and all modules can be filled to capacity with any (logically) valid combination of cards, with no engineering rules. .-i?[...]

  • Страница 532

    Operating power requirements 39 For calculations normally done in apparent or complex power (such as AC wire and panel size, UPS rating for AC reserve power, etc.), simply divide the total real power (in Watts) by the typical system power factor of 0.6 to obtain the complex power (in VA). Power engineering 553-3001-l 52 Power engineering 553-3001-l[...]

  • Страница 533

    40 Operating power requirements Worksheet A System power consumption - “Wired for” Typical Module Otv x Power = NT6D39 x400= NT6D44 x400= NT8Dll x500= NT8D13 x400= NT8D34 x300= NT8D35 x300= NT8D37 x550= NT8D47 x300= Pedestals x50= Typical Power (Watts) = . AC System Current Drain (Amps ac) Nominal: Typical Power / 230= DC System Current Drain ([...]

  • Страница 534

    Operating power requirements 41 Worksheet B NT8D13 Power calculation Circuit Pack QPC71F QPC192B QPC250B QPC297 QPC422A QPC430E QPC432C QPC449D QPC450E QPC578D QPC594D QPC659C QPC723 A QPC789A Qtv x Power = x 2.5 = x 12.0 = x 2.5 = -x 7.1 = x 10.9 = x 14.8 = x 10.2 = x 15.6 = x 7.0 = x 24.6 = x 32.8 = x 40.4 = x 14.8 = x 26.4 = Total NT8Dl3 Power ([...]

  • Страница 535

    42 Operating power requirements Worksheet C NT8D37 Power calculation I Circuit Pack otv NT8DOlAC NT8DOlAD NT8DO2AA NTaDo3AA IYT’8DO9AA NT8D 14ti NT8DlSAA NT8D16AA x Power = x32= x32= x28= x20= x20= x36= x34= x7= . Total NT8D37 Power (Watts)= Power engineering 553-3001-l 52 C.[...]

  • Страница 536

    Operating power requirements 43 Worksheet D System Power Consumption - “As equipped” . . :, .-..... . .._._ . . . . ;‘: ,“.z;;‘23 ._I _.. ,..,_ I Typical f Mod& Otv x Power = NT6D39 x400= NT6D44 x400= .: NTSDll x500= NTSD13 (from Worksheet B) = NTSD34 x300= NTSD35 x300= NT8D37 (from Worksheet C) = NTSD47 x300= Pedestals x50= _’ Typ[...]

  • Страница 537

    44 Operating power requirements Upgrades to existing itistallations Total power consumption of an installed system can be determined in several different ways. Two methods are listed below, in order of decreasing accuracy. Measure current drain for the complete installation over at .least a two- .’ _ -’ - week period under actual operating cond[...]

  • Страница 538

    . . . . Operating power requirements 45 Table 15 SL-1 system heat dissipation Module Heat dissipation Watts BTUlhr NT8Dll Common/Peripheral 450 1530 Equipment NT6D39 CPU/Network 400 1360 NT8D34 CPU 300 1020 NT8D35 Network 300 1020 NT8D13 Peripheral Equipment 300 1020 NT8D37 Peripheral Equipment 425 1450 NT8D47 Remote Peripheral 300 1020 Equipment N[...]

  • Страница 539

    46 Operating power requirements .- Power engineering 553-3001-152 .u : . . r[...]

  • Страница 540

    47 Reserve power Reserve power is available for both AC and DC systems. AC reserve power is provided by a separate Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS), installed in series with the main system AC power feed. A UPS generally consists of a combination battery charger (AC-DC converter) and inverter (DC-AC converter), along with its associated batteries[...]

  • Страница 541

    48 Reserve power UPS sizing Since power distribution for AC systems is provided on a per-column basis, partial system backup is available for all system options, thus reducing reserve power requirements. In other words, it is possible to back up all of the common equipment, but only a portion of the peripheral equipment, reducing both UPS and batte[...]

  • Страница 542

    Reserve power 49 Table 17 Verified UPS systems Vendor Alpha Technologies Alpha Technologies Alpha Technologies Best Power Technobgy Best Power Technology Exide Electronics Exide Electronics Exide Electronics Exide Electronics Exide Electronics Exide Electronics KVA Rating 1 1.5 3 3 5 1.5 3 5 6 8 10 Battery Voltage 48 48 48 48 48 120 120 120 240 240[...]

  • Страница 543

    50 Resetve power The UPS systems are available directly from the recommended vendors. For application assistance and direct sales information, the UPS vendor contacts in the U.S. are listed below: Alpha Technologies, Inc. 3767 Alpha Way Bellingham, WA 98225 (206) 647-2360 Fax: (206) 671-4936 Best Power Technology, Inc. P.O. Box 280 Necedah,WI 54646[...]

  • Страница 544

    Reserve power 51 Alarm Monitoring ^ A UPS to System Monitor Alarm cable is available from Northern Telecom for each of the recommended UPS vendors. The alarm interface consists of an “inverter on” signal to indicate that the commercial power is down and the UPS is supplying power to the system, and a “summary a@m” signal from the UPS to ind[...]

  • Страница 545

    52 Reserve power Figure 14 AC reserve power configuration Commercial AC power in Optional external I Battery bank I ” f-z!. ;:c .Y 2: .‘ ;. -‘_.. . ^,. :...I _~ :-. Power engineering 553-3001-152 I -[...]

  • Страница 546

    Y Reserve power 53 - DC reserve power Reserve power for DC systems can be provided simply by adding batteries to the external distribution. The reserve battery capacity is determined by multiplying the system current drain by the time that is needed for the reserve power to operate. This will determine the total Ampere-Hour requirements of the batt[...]

  • Страница 547

    54 Reserve power The float and equalization voltages defined in Table 19 are not an exact requirement as long as voltages do not exceed -56.5 V. See Table 7 in “DC power description.” Not all sealed cells require equalization, but the equalization voltage can be used for fast charging. Batteries to be used with the SL-1 should be sized by using[...]

  • Страница 548

    55 Engineering and configuration guidelines Configuring the Meridian 1 power system requires attention to the following points: - Both AC and DC-powering are available. - The AC power supply or DC-DC Converter that is used in a particular module is virtually identical as far as external configuration purposes are I. concerned. - Equipment Module po[...]

  • Страница 549

    56 Engineering and configuration guidelines AC power architecture ^ The internal AC power system consists of the following main elements: - Pedestal Power Distribution Unit (PDU) - Module Power Distribution Unit (MPDU) _ - AC Power Supplies No arbitrary selection of these components is required - they are included automatically in the System functi[...]

  • Страница 550

    Engineering and configuration guidelines 57 : i : ,~ ~ :,:.. . . . . ._ .: : ,.: ..,. :. . . . . _: ,_ ., Peripheral Equipment Power Supply AC (NT8DO6AA) The Peripheral Equipment Power Supply AC is used to provide power to all peripheral equipment modules in J% systems. It converts 208/240 V ac to +5 V, +8.5 V, f10 V, +15 V, and -48 V dc voltages u[...]

  • Страница 551

    58 Engineering and configuration guidelines Pedestal (NT8D27AB) - The Pedestal supports the column of Equipment Modules, and houses the Power Distribution Unit, the Blower Unit, and a reusable dust filter. The Field Wiring Terminal Block is mounted in the bottom of the Pedestal. Configuration guidelines - One per column in AC systems - The Field Wi[...]

  • Страница 552

    Engineering and configuration guidelines 59 Configuration guidelines One per hkdule’in AC systems : .: .’ : The internal DC power system consists of the following main elements: - Pedestal Power Distribution Unit (PDU) - - DC Power Converters Like AC systems, there are three different DC power converters that provide power to all of the common [...]

  • Страница 553

    60 Engineering and configuration guidelines internal DC power equipment components. The following components are required to configure and DC powered system. Common Equipment Power Supply DC (NT6D41 AA) .,- -4 The Common Equipment Power Supply DC is used in the common equipment c$;;j Modules in DC systems. It is located in the first slot on the lef[...]

  • Страница 554

    Engineering and configuration guidelines 61 - Common/Peripheral Equipment Module (NT8DllDC ) - Remote Peripheral Equipment Module (NT8D47DC) Ringing Generator DC (NT7D03AA) The AC Ringing Generator DC operates from a nominal .48 V dc input and provides selectable AC ringing voltage outputs superimposed on -48 V dc. The frequency and voltage options[...]

  • Страница 555

    62 Engineering and configuration guidelines Switched Mode Rectifier -46VBOA (NTGD5qAA) Converts 208/240 V ac (nominal) to -48 V dc (nominal), with a 30A output. Connects to the system through the QBLlS Battery Distribution Box. Based on QRF12. , Configuration guidelines System options 21/51/61 (DC versions). Generally one rectifier per every two fu[...]

  • Страница 556

    Engineering and configuration guidelines 63 Rectifier Bafflehloirnting Kit (Nl7D1201) The Rectifier Baffle/Mounting Kit consists of a set of support brackets for mounting the NT6D52AA Rectifier to to NT7D12AA Rack, together with a heat baffle plate. The baffle directs exhaust air from the lower rectifier away from the inlet to the upper rectifier, [...]

  • Страница 557

    64 Engineering and configuration guidelines Configuration guidelines Used with system option 71 (DC version). Quautity as required by system power consumptioti. Switched Mode Rectifier - 48VEOA (NT5CO3BJ) This is a solid state, switched-mode rectifier. Converts 208/240 V ac (nominal) to 48 V dc (nominal), with a 50A output. Used in the QCA13 power [...]

  • Страница 558

    _ .-: Power engineering 553-3001-152 Engineering and configuration guidelines 65 - No lighting, air conditioning, heating, generators or motors shall be serviced from this equipment room panel. - In areas where isolated ground systems are permissible, this panel will provide sufficient ground connection points on the isolated ground plate or bar to[...]

  • Страница 559

    66 Engineering and configuration guidelines The following must also be-observed to implement the single-point ground: - All ground conductors must conform to local codes and terminate in a manner that is permanent, resulting in low impedance connections. - All terminations should be accessible for inspection and maintenance. - All grounding conduct[...]

  • Страница 560

    67 Power conductors Wire size calculation guidelines Determining wire gauges to connect a pedestal to a rectifier or other external distribution hardware is a very simple procedure, but it can be tedious if a lot of external components are involved. A programmable calculator or computer can help if it is going to be done often. Too many wire gauges[...]

  • Страница 561

    68 Power conductors The formula The following formula may be used to calculate the minimum wire size in Circular Mils (CM) required to connect any two points knowing current, distance and the desired drop for a specific cable: CM= 11.1x Ix D/V where: CM = wire size required in Circular Mils I = current in amps (use the maximum expected) D = distanc[...]

  • Страница 562

    Power conductors 69 Table 21 Maximum allowable voltage drops I Conductor From To V drop - BAT Pedestal Dist. DisChg 1.0 + BR Pedestal Dist. Corn 1.0 -BAT Dist. (- ) Battery term 0.25 +BR Dist. (+) Battery term 0.25 -BAT Rectifier Disk Chg 0.5 + BR Rectifier Dist. Corn 0.5 Mote 7: Dist. is an abbreviation for Battery Distribution Box (i.e. QBL15, Ct[...]

  • Страница 563

    70 Power conductors 2. A Bat or BR conductor from the QBLl5 to the Battery is 25 feet long and must carry a maximum of 70 Amps: 0 .’ . ., . . --.. j;.,‘::;: ;,. 3 _ . ,. ., L.. X.,,” . I;,::‘“>.?:~ Using CM= 11.1x Ix D/V CM = 11.1.x 70 x 25/0.5 = 38850 ” ’ Choosing a standard gauge equal to or larger than this will mean 4 AWG which[...]

  • Страница 564

    Power conductors 71 column draws more or less than 60 Amps. Consult a wire handbook for precise calculations. There are four options available for bringing wire into the pedestal: Single conduit One 3/4 inch conduit access. Dual conduit Two 3/4 inch conduit accesses. Junction box (single 4 AWG) A junction box can be used to interface to one of the [...]

  • Страница 565

    72 Power conductors Table 22 Pedestal wire guage requirements with two 30 A feeds (five’wiresj Wire AWG Length Single Dual conduit Junction box with Junction box with conduit single #4 AWG’ double #I4 AWG* 8 6 4 4 O-loft Yes Yes Yes Yes 0-20ft Yes Yes Yes Yes o-3oft Yes Yes Yes Yes 0-4Oit Yes Yes Yes Yes 0-50ft Yes Yes Yes Yes 0-60ft No Yes Yes[...]

  • Страница 566

    73. List of terms AC ACEG AWG BAT BR bkr BRTN CE CEC ckt CPC CSA DC DisChg EPE FGND Alternating Current AC Equipment Ground American Wire Gauge Battery Battery Return breaker (abbreviation) Battery Return Common Equipment Canadian Electrical Code circuit (abbreviation) Common Product Code Canadian Standards Association Direct Current Discharge Exis[...]

  • Страница 567

    74 List of terms HZ IG I inverter LR LRE MPDU mS NEC PBX Pcord PDU PE PEC PFTU Pwr QBLlP QBL15 QCA13 QRFl2 RPE SPG telco Hertz (cycles per second) - Isolated Ground DC to AC converter Logic Return Logic Return Equalizer Module (UEM) Power Distribution Unit millisecond National Electrical Code (USA) Private Branch Exchange Power Cord (abbreviation) [...]

  • Страница 568

    List of terms 75 UEM UL ._ -I. :: -, :z.; I- ..;., ups .i L.ZeI ,T .-. ._:< VAC,Vac VDC.Vdc W Universal EQuipment Module Underwriters Laboratories Uninterruptible Power System Volts AC Volts DC Volts peak Power engineering 553-3001-l 52 . ..’ ‘...[...]

  • Страница 569

    SL-1 System options 21,51,61,71 Power engineering Copyright 0 1990 Northern Telecom All rights reserved. information subject to change without notice. Release 1.0 Standard January, 1990 Printed in U.S.A. ::.:.“,, 3 : ; . .[...]

  • Страница 570

    :/ ic.: -: ,~ ;.i : .::. .,- : _:: !._, <:::-7.‘ :-: :: ?-i ,. . . . ^ :, . . : .~ ,. SL-1 System options 21,51,61,71 Spares planning Standard[...]

  • Страница 571

    [...]

  • Страница 572

    SL-1 System options 21,5-l, 61,71 Spares planning Publication number: 553-3001-153 Document release: 1 .O Document status: Standard Date: January 29,199O . . - 0 1990 Northern Telecom All rights resewed. Spares planning 553-3001-l 53 . .[...]

  • Страница 573

    ii Revision history January 29,199O Standard, release 1.0 Spares planning 553-3001-153 . .[...]

  • Страница 574

    iii About this document General information The Spares planning guide provides all the information necessary for the calculation and planning of spares (replaceable) items and provides failure rates for the SL-1 hardware. The success of a maintenance program depends largely on the availability of an adequate stock of replaceable items. To ease main[...]

  • Страница 575

    iv About this document - System engineering (553-3001-151) - Power engineering (553-3001-152) - Sparesplanning (553-3001-153) - Equipment identflcation and ordering (553-3001-154) See the list of line and trunk circuit descriptions in the Master index (553-3001-000) for specific references to lines and trunks. See the SL-1 installation and maintena[...]

  • Страница 576

    Contents V Spares planning 1 Definitions and assumptions 1 Calculating spares requirements 5 Tables: NFT values 7 Failure rates Spares planning 553-3001-l 53 s. :.. :[...]

  • Страница 577

    vi Contents ._ .i . . .-. ,“. ::. ‘:. 1. 1 Spares planning 553-3001-l 53[...]

  • Страница 578

    1 Spares planning Definitions and assumptions Failure rate-Failure rate equals the estimated number of failures for that item during one million (106) hours of operation. The only exception is to measurements for cabling or other items with low failure rates. Rates are also measured in Failures in Time (FIT) measurements. One FIT equals one billion[...]

  • Страница 579

    2 Definitions and assumptions Turnaround time for rep&r-The turnaround time for the return to stock of a failed item is about 10 working days (240 hours) from a repair house. (See Figure 1.) Figure 1 Single depot or repair house service Repair House 553-1559 Depots I -- Spares planning 553-3001-153[...]

  • Страница 580

    Definitions and assumptions 3 .: . . L ., ,. . . 1.: ...%-. ,“TS .:I :.:: :1: The turnaround timk for the return &I stock of a failed item is about two days from a centralized depot, (See Figure 2.) Figure 2 Centralized depot service 1 O-Day Turnaround Time (240 hrs.) 1 O-Day Turnaround Time (240 hrs.) Y-Day ;rnaro,und Tirnry Spares planning [...]

  • Страница 581

    4 Definitions and assumptions Actual turnaround periods Will vary in the field. As the number of systems served increases, the percentage of replaceable items required for stock is reduced. (See Figure 3.) Figure 3 Effect of turnaround on spares stock “” I I I 50 - 50 - - lo-Day turnaround - lo-Day turnaround -----2-Day turnaround -----2-Day tu[...]

  • Страница 582

    Definitions and assumptions 5 Calculating spares requirements Replaceable items and their associated failure rates are listed in this document. Quantities of spares required to stock a depot for the one-year sparing interval can be calculated by following the procedures. Table 1 translates the NPT values to the number of spares required for that it[...]

  • Страница 583

    6 Definitions and assumptions Procedure 1 Determining spares quantities to stock a depot for the one-year sparing interval 1 Determine the number (N) of in-service specified circuit packs serviced by the depot. 2 Determine the pack failure rate (F) for the specified circuit pack in the Spares planning guide. (See Note 1 below.) 3 Determine turnarou[...]

  • Страница 584

    7 Tables: NFT values Table 1 Stock qu, antity of spares 2.94 3.46 11 12.9 13.60 27 3.46 4.01 12 13.6 14.30 28 4.01 4.58 13 14.3 15.00 29 4.58 5.16 14 15.0 15.80 30 5.16 5.76 5.76 6.37 15 15.8 16 16.5 -continued- 1 16.50 i 31 1 17.20 32 Spares planning 553-3001-153 .[...]

  • Страница 585

    8 Tables: NFTvalues Table 1 continued Stock quantity of spares Spares planning 553-3001-153 -.[...]

  • Страница 586

    Tables: NFTvalues 9 Table 1 continued Stock quantity of spares -continued- Spares planning 553-3001-l 53[...]

  • Страница 587

    10 Tables: NFT values Table 1 continued Stock quantity of spares Spares planning 553-3001-l 53[...]

  • Страница 588

    Tables: NFTvalues 11 Table 1 continued Stock quantity of spares NFT values Number of spares NFT values Number of spares Spares planning 553-3001-153[...]

  • Страница 589

    12 Tables: NFT values Table 1 continued Stock quantity of spares Spares planning 553-3001-153 .d : . . :.[...]

  • Страница 590

    Tables: NFTvalues 13 Table 1 continued Stock quantity of spares -amtinued- Spares planning 553-3001-l 53 k.[...]

  • Страница 591

    14 Tables: NFT values Table 1 continued Stock quantity of spares _.- ._,.. . . s :-. .‘-’ -.. .” .j Spares planning 553-3001-l 53[...]

  • Страница 592

    15 Failure rates This section lists replaceable items used in SL-1s and provides their associated failure rates. Some failure rates are not available (N/A) at this time but will be offered in a supplement to this document. The replaceable items are grouped according to equipment types as follows: - universal equipment modules - cooling equipment - [...]

  • Страница 593

    16 Failure rates Table 2 Failure rates of modules 1 Table 3 Failure rates of cooling equipment Spares planning 553-3001-153[...]

  • Страница 594

    Failure rates 1 i’ -- Table 4 Failure rates of circuit packs PEC/NT Code NT8DOlAD NTSDOlAC NT8DO2AA NT8DO3AB NT8DO4AA NT8DO9AB NT8D14AA NT8DlSAA NT8D16AA NT8D17AA NT8D18AA NT8D19AA NT8D41AA Superloop Network Card Description Controller-2 Message Waiting Line Card Controller-4 Digital Line Card Analog Line Card I Failure Rate per 106 hrs 5.1 1 6.5[...]

  • Страница 595

    18 Failure rates Table 4 continued - Failure rates of circuit packs Law) QPC254 Tone and Digit Switch (A- 14.66 Law) --continued- , Spares planning 553-3001-l 53 ’ . .[...]

  • Страница 596

    Failure rates 19 .; .‘.:. -:‘-. ( .-. .I, : ; =,; : . ...; ./ Table 4 continued - Failure rates of circuit packs PECINT 1 Description 1 Failure Rate Code QPc266 ACD Interface _ per 106 hrs .0.37 QPC272 CO and FX Trunk 10.90 QI’C280 Conference (A-Law) 13.95 QPC284 500 Line Circuit (A-Law) 8.53 QPC285 QPC286 SL- 1 Line Circuit (A-Law) 500 Line [...]

  • Страница 597

    20 Failure rates Table 4 continued - Failure rates of circuit packs PEC/NT Description Failure Rate Code per lo6 hrs QlT295 CO, FX, MR DET Trunk _ 10.46 Ql’C296 QPC297 Circuit (A-Law) 4-Wire E&M Trunk (A-Law) Attendant Console Monitor 8.38 7.85 QPC301 @Law) CDR ROM 10.05 QPC327 QPC330 LineCard MFC Sender/Receiver Buffered Message Register 20.[...]

  • Страница 598

    Failure rates 21 Table 4 continued - Failure rates of circuit packs -continued- Spares planning 553-3001-153 -. :. :[...]

  • Страница 599

    22 Failure rates Table 4 continued - Failure rates of circuit packs QPC464 Peripheral Buffer 9.00 QPC47 1 Clock Controller 2.44 QPC472 Digital Trunk Interface 6.00 QPC473 1 DTI Carrier Interface ! 6.60 QPC475 QPC477 1 Digitone Receiver [ Bus Terminating Unit I -continued- I Spares planning 553-3001-153 c : :[...]

  • Страница 600

    Failure rates 23 Table 4 continued - Failure rates of circuit packs 1 PEC/NT 1 Description 1 Failure Rate1 Code QPC494 QPC496 QPC500 500/2500 Message Waiting Extender PE Backplane per lo6 hrs 8.00 0.69 3.24 1 QFC527 QPC528 QPC532 QPC536 OF040 1 CO/FX/WATS trunk (A-law) 1 12.37 1 CO/IX/WATS trunk - (EIA) 14.23 Grd Button Line Card 13.93 Digital Trun[...]

  • Страница 601

    24 Failure rates Table 4 continued - Failure rates of circuit packs Centralized Attendant Spares planning 553-3001-153[...]

  • Страница 602

    Failure rates 25 Table 4 continued - Failure rates of circuit packs PEC/NT Description Failure Rate Code per lo6 hrs Ql’C673 512K RAM Memory Card 5.04 QPC674 256K Memory with Error 5.80 Correction QPC706 Half PE Expansion Power 1.14 QPC710 QPC720 QPC723 Converter, ist tier p-Law Digitone Receiver Primary Rate Interface Card RS-232 Interface Line [...]

  • Страница 603

    26 Failure rates Table 5 Failure rates of station equipment PEC/NT Description Failure Rate Code per lo9 hrs Ml250 Console N/A M2250 TCM Console N/A M2006 Digital Telephone N/A M2008 Digital Telephone 3.10 M2016S Digital Telephone 3.90 M2216 Digital Telephone M2616 Digital Telephone N/A N/A M3000 Touchphone N/A NE-500/2500 500/2500 Telephone Set N/[...]

  • Страница 604

    Failure rates 27 Table 5 continued - Failure rates of station equipment PEC/NT Code Q=l Q ,:: QM-I-2 QMT3 QMT4 QMTll QMT12 QMTl5 QMT21 Description Failure Rate per lo6 hrs Handsfiee Interface/Remote 0.33 Powering Kit Automatic Handsfree 0.82 Interface Kit Headset Kit 0.25 lo-Button Key Lamp 2.89 Expansion Module 20-Button Key Lamp 4.73 Expansion Mo[...]

  • Страница 605

    28 Failure rates Table 6 Failure rates of power equipment PEC/NT- 1 Description 1 Failure Rate 1 Code per 106 hrs NTSC03BJ Switched Mode Rectifier . N/A -48V/50A NT6D40AA DC Peripheral Equipment 1.6 Power Supply NT6D4 1AA DC Common Equipment 0.6 I Power Supply I NT6D52AA 1 Switched Mode Rectifier 1.2 NTi’DO3AA NT7DO4AA 43Vf30A DC Ringing Generato[...]

  • Страница 606

    Failure rates 29 Table 6 continued - Failure rates of power equipment 1 PEC/NT 1 Description 1 Failure Rate Code per lo6 hrs NT8D62AA Temperature Sensor Panel N/A NT8D62DC QBL12 Battery Distribution Box 1.10 1 QBLl5 I Power/Battery Distribution I 2.81 QCA13 Box DC Power Plant 1 QCA321 I Junction Box ! N/A QPC188 QRF12 1 Battery Monitor I 48V Rectif[...]

  • Страница 607

    SL-1 System options 21,51,61,71 Spares planning Copyright 0 1990 Northern Telecom All rights resewed. Information subject to change without notice. Release 1 .O Standard January 29, 1990 Printed in U.S.A. nit northarn talocom[...]

  • Страница 608

    ,.., 1::::: :: : -,: ::: .: ‘; SL-1 System options 21,51,61,?1 Equipment identification and ordering information Standard C.[...]

  • Страница 609

    -- . .[...]

  • Страница 610

    SL-1 System options 21,51,61,71 Equipment identification and ordering information Publication number: 553-3001-154 Document release: 1 .O Document status: Standard Date: January 29,199O . . . .._” ,. ::-, : :-; ,. _.;.: .,.) ‘. 0 1990 Northern Telecom All right reserved Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154[...]

  • Страница 611

    ii Revision history January 29,199O Standard, release 1.0 Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154 . .[...]

  • Страница 612

    . . . III About this document This document identifies equipment of the Meridian 1 System options 21, 5 1,61,71 that can be ordered individually. The items are described in terms of purpose, quantity required, and system hardware (system option), as appropriate. References See the SL-1 planning & engineering guide for - Master index (553-3001-0[...]

  • Страница 613

    iv About this document - General maintenance information (553-3001~500) - Fault clearing (553-3001-510) - Hardware replacement (553-3001-520) See the SL-1 XII software guide for an overviewbf software kchitecture, procedures for software installation and management, and a detailed description of all Xl 1 features and services. This information is c[...]

  • Страница 614

    V Contents General 1 Equipment packages 1 Conversion and expansion packages 1 Equipment availability 2 Special features 2 Product coding . 2 Universal Equipment Modules and packaging NT6D39AA, NT6D39DC CPU/Network Module NT6D44AA, NT6D44DC Meridian Mail Module NT8Dll AC, NT8Dll DC CUPE Module NT8D13AA, NT8D13DC Peripheral Equipment Module -- NT8D34[...]

  • Страница 615

    vi Contents NT6D52AA Switched Mode Rectifier -48V/30A NT6D53AA Junction Box NT6D5303 Logic Return Equalizer NT7D0003 Fan and Sensor Panel NT7D03AA Ringing Generator DC NT7D04AA CUPE Power Supply DC - NT7DiOAA Power Distribution Unit DC NT7D12AA Rectifier Rack NT7D14AA CE/PE Power Supply AC NT7D15AA System Monitor - System option 21 A NT7D17AC Fan U[...]

  • Страница 616

    Contents vii QMM42 Security Data Cartridge QPC43 Peripheral Signaling ,.; QPC215 Segmented Bus Extender . _ . . . . :‘: .-- .^ f:j i ‘y’.,.$,:, z.; QPC412 Intergroup Switch /“.._ -_ ./ :, .: >‘,S y::,, QPC414 Network QPC417 Junctor Board QPC441 Three-Port Extender QPC471 Clock Controller QPC477 Bus Terminating Unit QPC513 Enhanced Seri[...]

  • Страница 617

    viii Contents QPC237 4-wire E&M/DX signaling trunk 46 QPC250 Release Link Trunk 47 QPC297 Attendant Console Monitor 47 QPC422 Tone Detector 47 ;:‘:5~: QPC430 Asynchronous Interface Line 48 _. . _ ‘l.z. 3 -<<.x-s.; 1 .J QPC432 4-Port Data Line 48 QPC449 Loop Signaling Trunk 48 QPC450 CO/FWWATS Trunk 49 QPC578 Integrated Services Digita[...]

  • Страница 618

    Contents ix Station equipment replaceable items 67 Cabling NT7Dll AE module-to-module power harness NT8D40AA AC power cord NT8D40AM module-to-module power-harness NT8D40AY AC power cord NT8D40BJ System Monitor to backplane cable NT8D40BK System Monitor trip cable NT8D46AA System Monitor column cable NT8D46AC Thermostat harness NT8D46AD System Monit[...]

  • Страница 619

    x Contents NT8D88 Network to I/O cable 80 NT8D90AF SDI multiple-port cable - internal 80 NT8D91 Network to Controller cable 81 NT8D92AB Controller to l/O cable 81 NT8D93 SDI paddle board (Dual Port) I/O to DTUDCE cable 81 NT8D95 SDI I/O to DTUDCE cable . 82 NT8D97AX PRVDTI I/O to MDF cable 82 NT8D98 Inter-cabinet Network cable 82 NT8D99 CPU to Netw[...]

  • Страница 620

    1 General The selection of a system option that best meets individual requirements is determined by the following factors: - Number and type of terminal devices required - Number and type of trunks required - Traffic requirements for lines, trunks and consoles - Special features required - Growth forecast in terms of ports and features Refer to Sys[...]

  • Страница 621

    2 General Equipment availability - The equipment listed in this Northern Telecom Publication is available through Northern Telecom. Equipment may not be available in all market areas and may be discontinued at any time. Contact a Northern Telecom sales office for equipment availability. Special features Special features are purchased as options to [...]

  • Страница 622

    General 3 Figure l-l Modular and apparatus coding cohparisbn MW CODE (MDS) QLD CODE IAPPARATUS NT OR00 AA 01 I I fixed prefix QPC 123 A A 1 1 I SL-1 circuit pack release number series 553-3046 Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154 . . . :.[...]

  • Страница 623

    4 General Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-l 54 . .[...]

  • Страница 624

    5 Universal Equipment Modules and packaging _, .~ :- .: .. :-.:._ ;. .;,, _.‘;, _I : ._ Universal Equipment Modules (UEMs) are self-contained equipment modules which house system components such as card cages, circuit cards, power units, mass storage units, and cabling. Each UEM is approximately 80 cm (31.5 in.) wide, 52.1 cm (20.5 in.) deep (55.[...]

  • Страница 625

    6 Universal Equipment Modules and packaging This module is available in two versions: - NT6D39AA for AC systems - NT6D39DC for DC systems The NT6D39 CPU/NET card cage contains 18 card slots which support the following: - network cards - Clock Controller - Serial Data Interface (SDI)/Enhanced Serial Data Interface (ESDI) - Peripheral Signaling - 3-P[...]

  • Страница 626

    Universal Equipment Modules and packaging 7 - NT6D44AA for AC systems - NT6D44DC for DC systems The Meridian Mail Module is powered by two Common Equipment Power Supplies. Refer to the Meridian Mail suite of documents (553-7041-xxx) for detailed information. Quantity-Maximum of five per system NT8Dll AC, NT8Dll DC CE/PE Module System hardwareSystem[...]

  • Страница 627

    8 Universal Equipment Modules and packaging The NT8Dll CE/PE Module is powered by a Common/Peripheral Equipment (CE/PE) Power Supply. Quantity-One per system NT8D13AA, NT8D13DC Peripheral Equipment Module System hardwareSystem option 21/51/61/71 Purpose-The NT8D13 Peripheral Equipment Module (hereafter referred to as NT8D13 PE) supports the Dual Lo[...]

  • Страница 628

    Universal Equipment Modules and packaging 9 - CPU Interface - MS1 - Segmented Bus Extender (SBE) - DCHI - PRI/DTI - Clock Controller - Mass Storage Unit (MSU) or Floppy Disk Unit (FDU) The NT8D34 CPU Module is powered by a Common Equipment Power SUPPlY * I. Quantity-Two per system NT8D35AA, NT8D35DC Network Module System hardware-System option 71 P[...]

  • Страница 629

    10 Universal Equipment Modules and packaging - PFu/DTl The NT8D35 NET Module is powered by a Common Equipment Power S”PPlY. Quantity-A maximum of 10 per system (five network groups) NT8D36AA Inter Group Module System hardware--System option 71 Purpose-The NT8D36AA Inter Group Module provides a path for the switching of traffic between the network[...]

  • Страница 630

    Universal Equipment Modules and packaging 11 - Digital Line card (DLC) - Analog Message Waiting Line card (MLC) The NT8D37 IPE Module is powered by a Peripheral Equipment Power Supply, and a Ringing Generator when 500/2500 sets are supported by the module. Quantity-As required; refer to System engineering (553-3001-151) .: : NT8D47AA, NT8D47DC Remo[...]

  • Страница 631

    12 Universal Equipment Modules and packaging I - PRI/DTI (optional) The NT8D47 WE Module is powered by a Common Equipment/Peripheral Equipment Power Supply. Quantity-Since each NT8D47 WE Module serves two network loops, the number of modules required per system depends on the number of stations in the remote site. NT8D49 Spacer Kit System Hardware-[...]

  • Страница 632

    Universal Equipment Modules and packaging 13 . . :.: .: .,.. I.. 1 ..,. ‘.’ ;:-..: : - NT6D3903 NT6D39AA/DC CPU/Network Module - NT8D1103 NT8Dl lAC/DC Common/Peripheral Equipment Module - NT8D1303 NT8D13AA/DC Peripheral Equipment Module - NT8D3403 NT8D34AA/DC CPU Module - NT8D3503 NT8D35AA/DC Network Module - NT8D3703 NT8D37AA/DC Intelligent Pe[...]

  • Страница 633

    14 Universal Equipment Modules and packaging :,i, - NT8D27AC for System option’21A only - NT7DO9AA for DC systems The pedestal for AC and DC systems (except System option 21A) can house any of the following field replaceable assemblies: - Power Distribution Unit NT8D53AB or NT7DlOAA - Blower Unit NT8D52A.A or NT8D52DC - Fan Unit NT7D17AC or NT7D1[...]

  • Страница 634

    15 Power and cooling equipment A0367754 Top Cap Fan System Hardware-System option 21A Purpose-The A0367754 Top Cap Fan is located in the Fan and Sensor Panel. It provides cooling for the NT7D14AA CE/PE power Supply AC. There is no speed or temperature control provided with it. Power. to the Top Cap Fan is controlled by the circuit breaker located o[...]

  • Страница 635

    16 Power and cooling equipment Quantity--One Peripheral Equipment Power Supply DC is used in each of the following DC modules: - Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module (NTSD37DC) - Peripheral Equipment Module (NT8Dl3DC) NT6D41AA Common Equipment Power Supply DC System Hardware-All Purpos-The Common Equipment Power Supply DC is used in the common e[...]

  • Страница 636

    Power and cooling equipment 17 NT6D53AA Junction Box System Hardware-All (DC version) Purpose-The Junction Box is required when the distance from the rectifier to the pedestal is over 0.74 m (8 ft), which requires wire larger than 10 AWG. It provides a set of connection terminals for the 4-AWG wire that comes from the rectifier, and a set of connec[...]

  • Страница 637

    18 Power and cooling equipment NT7D03AA Ringing Generator DC System Hardware-All Purpose-The Ringing Generator DC operates from a nominal -48V DC input and provides selectable AC ringing voltage outputs superimposed on -48 VDC. The frequency and voltage options are-20/25/50 Hi and 70/80/86 VAC. It also supplies -150V DC Message Waiting lamp 500/250[...]

  • Страница 638

    Power and cooling equipment 19 Quantity-One p&pedestal/column in DC systems NT7D12AA Rectifier Rack System Hardware-21/51/61 (DC versions) Purpose-This is a 48.3-cm (19-in.) open relay rack which is approximately 1.5 m (5 ft) high. It supports up to three NT6D52AA Rectifiers in a single column. Quantity-One rack per every three NT6D52.44 Rectif[...]

  • Страница 639

    20 Power and cooling equipment NT7D17AC Fan Unit AC - System Hardware-System option 21 with up to two tiers Purpose-The NT7D17AC Fan Unit AC is housed within the pedestal and provides cooling for the entire column. It consists of three fans and a circuit breaker located in the front. Quantity-One per pedestal NT7D17DC Fan Unit DC System Hardware-Sy[...]

  • Страница 640

    Power and cooling equipment 21 Quantity--One Peripheral Equipment Power Supply AC is used in each of the following AC modules: - Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module (NT8D37AA) - Peripheral Equipment Module (NT8D13AA) - NT8D21AA Ringing Generator AC System Hardware-All Purpose-The Ringing Generator AC operates from a nominal 208/240 VAC input an[...]

  • Страница 641

    22 Power and cooling equipment NT8D29AA Common Equipment Power Supply AC System Hardware--System option 51/61/71 Purpose-The Common Equipment Power Supply AC is used in the common equipment modules in AC systems. It is located in the first slot on the left in the module labeled “CE Pwr Sup”. It converts 208/24OV AC to +5V and f12 V DC to provid[...]

  • Страница 642

    Power and cooling equipment 23 ‘. . 2.::. :; i ..,,-_. ,.:i NT8D52AA Blower Unit - System Hardware-All Purpose-The Blower Unit is part of the system cooling assembly and provides forced-convection cooling. Housed within the pedestal, it contains two backward-curved impellers (rotor blades) which are cylindrically shaped, approximately 22.8 cm (9.[...]

  • Страница 643

    24 Power and cooling equipment NT8D53AD Power Distribution Unit - System option 21A System Hardware-System option 21A Purpose--The Power Distribution Unit - System option 21A is a panel located in the pedestal. It contains a circuit breaker, a terminal block, and an EM1 filter. The power cable enters the pedestal and connects to the circuit breaker[...]

  • Страница 644

    Power and cooling equipment 25 breaker and is use&in conjunction with the NT8DO6AA PE Power Supply AC and the NTSD21AA Ringing Generator AC. Quantity-One per NTSD13AA PE or NT8D37AA IPE Module NT8D62AA, NT8D62DC Temperature Sensor Panel System Hardware-AN except System option 21A Purpose-The NT8D62 Temperature Sensor Panel communicates with the[...]

  • Страница 645

    26 Power and cooling equipment QBLI 5 Power/Battery Distribution Box. System Hardware-System option 21/51/61 (DC versions) Purpose-Allows the parallel connection of up to three NT6D52AA Rectifiers, for connection to the system and to reserve batteries. Includes main fuses, diode blocking, test points, QPC188 battery monitor card, and sense lead fus[...]

  • Страница 646

    Power and cooling equipment 27 QRF12 -52 V Rectifier - System Hardware--System option 21/51/61 (DC version) Purpuse-Converts 115 V AC and 220 V AC to -52 V DC (nominal). QFW12B voltage conversions from 9OV to 129V, and l?OV to 25OV. Connects to the columns through the QBLi5 Power/Battery Distribution Box. Quantity-One for every two modules Equipmen[...]

  • Страница 647

    28 Power and cooling equipment Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154[...]

  • Страница 648

    29 Common Equipment cards NT8D04AA Super-loop Network System Hardware-All Purpose- Provides 120 time slots (one superloop) interface between Network and Intelligent Peripheral Equipment. Utilizes the equivalence of four network loops. May be connected to one or two NT8DOl Controller card(s). The Superloop Network card is equipped with a Motorola 68[...]

  • Страница 649

    30 Common Equipment cards Quantity-As required. R&fer to System engineering (553-3001-151) for engineering details. NT8Dl8AA NetworWDigitone Receiver System Hardware-System option 21 and 21A Purpose-Combines the functionality of the Network Controller and Digitone Receiver cards in a mother/daughterboard assembly. The motherboard plugs into a d[...]

  • Страница 650

    Common Equipment cards 31 - data rates of 300,600,1200,2400,4800, and 9600 baud - Data Terminal Equipment (DTB) mode - Data Communication Equipment (DCE) mode Quantity-Three maximum per NT8Dl lCE/pE Module; two maximum per NT6D39 CPU/NET Module NT8D68AA Floppy Disk Unit System hardwareSystem option 21/51/61/71 Purpose--The Floppy Disk Unit (FDU) is[...]

  • Страница 651

    32 Common Equipment cards .. Quantity-One per systeui j QMM42 Security Data Cartridge .i System Hardware-All Purpose-This is a security measure that allows a customer access only to software packages purchased for his system. This security data cartridge is mounted on either the QPC584 Mass Storage Interface or QPC742 Floppy Disk Interface card. Qu[...]

  • Страница 652

    Common Equipment cards 33 Quantity-Two pef Network Module (use vintage C when two or more groups are installed) QPC414 Network System Hardware-All Purpuse-Provides 30 time slots interface per each of two network loops. Provides speech path switching, signaling and control circuits for two network loops. Interfaces between network and NT8D13 PE, NT8[...]

  • Страница 653

    34 Common Equipment cards Quantity-Two for System option 71, and one per CPU when DTI or PU is required in other options. QPC477 Bus Terminating Unit System Hardware-System option 51/61/71 Purpose-Bus Terminating Units (BTUs) are installed in the CE Modules. They provide a logical termination to the CPU and network buses. They are paddle boards ins[...]

  • Страница 654

    Common Equipment cards 35 QPC579 CPU Function - System Hardware-System option 51/61/71 Purpose--The CPU Function card works in conjunction with the CPU Interface card (QPCSSO). It contains the main CPU logic circuitry. The CPU provides a 24-bit data bus. The CPU Function card contains a QPC939 system ROM. Quantity-One per CPU Module QPC580 CPU Inte[...]

  • Страница 655

    36 Common Equipment cards QPC584 Mass Storage Interface System Hardware-System option 51/61/71 i Purpose-Interface between the Multi Disk Unit (MDU) and CPU(s). Provides address matching, disk drive control, data buffering and interrupt control circuits. The MS1 is used with the MDU and contains: -two high capacity floppy disk drives or -one Winche[...]

  • Страница 656

    Common Equipment cards 37 QPC742 Floppy Disk Inte-rface System Hardware-All Purpose--interface between the Floppy Disk Unit (FDU) and one CPU. Provides address matching, disk drive control, data buffering and interrupt control circuits. Quantity-One per CPU QPC757 D-Channel Handler Interface System Hardware-All Purpose-The D-Channel Handler Interfa[...]

  • Страница 657

    38 Common Equipment cards QPC939 Read-Only Memory - System Hardware-System option 5 l/61/71 Purpose-Read-Only Memory @OM) daughterboard on the QPC579 CPU Function card. Quantity-One per CPU QPC940 Read-Only Memory System Hardware-System option 21 Purpose-ROM daughterboard on the QPC687 CPU with SDI/RTC card. Quantity-One per CPU Equipment identific[...]

  • Страница 658

    39 Peripheral Equipment cards NT8DOl AD Controller-2 System Hardware-All Purpose-Provides a primary interface and control function between the Superloop Network card and the IPE Module over up to two 10.24Mbs superloops. Each Controller-2 card serves up to 16 IPE cards. . . The Controller-2 card interfaces with up to two NT8DO4AA Superloop Network [...]

  • Страница 659

    40 Peripheral Equipment cards NT8D02AA Digital Line card - System Hardware-All Purpose--Provides interface to up to 16 digital integrated voice and data sets for a total of 32 ports. It is equipped with an Intel 8051-type microprocessor which performs several functions; some of which are as follows: - control of card operation - card identification[...]

  • Страница 660

    Peripheral Equipment cards 41 microprocessor which performs several functions, some of which are as follows: - control of card operation - card identification - self-test - status reporting to the Controller - maintenance diagnostics Quantity-Up to sixteen cards per NT8D37 IRE Module NT8D14AA Universal Trunk System Hardware-All Purpose-Provides int[...]

  • Страница 661

    42 Peripheral Equipment cards - Paging trunk The Universal Trunk card is software selectable and complies with CSA Standard C82.2 No. 0.7 - Ml985 and EL4 Standard 464A. Quantity-Up to sixteen cards per NT8D37 IPE Module NT8D15AA E&M Trunk System Hardware-All Purpose-Used in both A-Law and V-Law applications. Provides interface connecting the tr[...]

  • Страница 662

    Peripheral Equipment cards 43 NT8DlGAA Digitone Receiver System Hardware-All Purpose--Provides a total of eight channels of Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) detection. These channels are assigned on the DS30X loop. There is one 8 Kbps signaling channel provided for maintenance messaging and tone reporting. The NT8D16AA Digitone Receiver allows acce[...]

  • Страница 663

    44 Peripheral Equipment cards - Relays line status information to the processor - Decodes line control information from the processor Note: QPC63F or later vintage is required. Quantity-One for each network loop connected to the RPE Module at the local equipment location QPC65 Rernote Peripheral Switch System Hardware-System option 21/51/61/71 Purp[...]

  • Страница 664

    Peripheral Equipment cards 45 QPC67 Carrier Maintenance System Hardware-System option 21/51/61/71 Purpose-Used for RPE applications. Contains an M-type (3017 Hz) fault- locate filter. Provides DC detection circuitry for the fault-locate pair, and carrier loopback relays to facilitate software maintenance testing. Terminates and gives access to the [...]

  • Страница 665

    46 Peripheral Equipment cards QPC99 Carrier Interface - System Hardware-System option 21/51/61/71 Purpose-Used for RPE applications. Contains two carrier line receivers with 7.5 dB pads built-in. Converts bipolar line signals into TIL level signals. Provides facilities for carrier looping. Monitors system and invokes emergency transfer if carrier f[...]

  • Страница 666

    :.i s ..-.;:. ., _ . . . . . . - I ,.. ._/ . ‘. 1 L.:.::::;:. .:; 7.: ‘;.z’..: 7.:’ ‘-1 Peripheral Equipment cards 47 QPC250 Release Link Trirnk System Hardware-All Purpose-Used to interface a remote system, arranged for the Centralized Attendant Service (CAS) option, with the main system where CAS attendant is located. Refer to Centraliz[...]

  • Страница 667

    48 Peripheral Equipment cards QPC430 Asynchronous Interface Line System Hardware-All Purpose-Provides four asynchronous line ports. Used in the SL- 1 Data Feature to interface to data equipment conforming to the EIA RS-422 standard. Refer to SL-1 Data Feature-General-description and provisioning (553-2731-100) for more information. Note: QPC43OF or[...]

  • Страница 668

    Peripheral Equipment cards 49 QPC450 CO/FX/VVATS Trunk System Hardware-All Purpose-Interfaces four 600 or 900 GJ CO, FX or WATS trunks with the system in l.t-Law applications. The card can also detect ringing on either the tip or ring leads and has provision to extend the normal loop range fi-om 1200 SL to 2600 n using balanced battery boost from t[...]

  • Страница 669

    50 Peripheral Equipment cards DIGITONE station to dc pulses suitable for processing in the system control. I Quantity-One per NT8D13 PE Module QPC723 RS-232 4-Port Interface Line System Hardware-All Purpose-This card provides four direct interfaces to RS-232 asynchronous ASCII computer equipment, such as asynchronous hosts, modems, standard off-the[...]

  • Страница 670

    Station equipment Meridian Modular Telephanes The Meridian Modular Telephones are designed to provide cost effective integrated voice and data communication capability. The following Meridian Modular Telephones are available: - M2006-a single line telephone with 6 programmable keys - M2008-a multi-line set with 8 programmable keys - M2616-a high pe[...]

  • Страница 671

    52 Station equipment - Key Expansion Module Table 1 lists the ordering codes for the Meridian Modular Telephones, alone and with hardware options installed. Table 2 lists the hardware options that can be purchased separately, and Table 3 lists miscellaneous items. Refer to Meridian Modular Telephones-Description and specifications (553-2201-116) fo[...]

  • Страница 672

    Station equipment 53 Table 1 Order codes for Meridian Modular Telephones and faCtory histalled options (continued) Description i Ordering code M2008 (with MPDA) Black Chameleon Ash Dolphin Gray M2008 (with Display) NTZK08AB-03 (with power board) NTZK08AB-35 (with power board) NTZK08AB-93 (with power board) Black NTZK08BA-03 (with power board) Chame[...]

  • Страница 673

    54 Station equipment Table 1 Order codes for Meridian Modular Telephones and factory inktalled options (continued) Description Ordering code M2616 (with Display) Black NTZKl6BA-03 Chameleon Ash NTZK16BA35 Dolphin Gray NTZK16BA-93 M2616 (with MPDA and Display) Black Chameleon Ash Dolphin Gray NTZK16BB-03 (with power board) NTZK16BB-35 (with power bo[...]

  • Страница 674

    Station equipment 55 Table 1 Order codes for Meridian Modular Telephones and factory installed options (continued) Description , M2016S (with Display) Ordering code Black NTZK20BA-03 (with power board) Chameleon Ash NTZK20BA-35 (with power board) Dolphin Gray NTZK20BA-93 (with power board) M2016S (withMPDA and Display) Black Chameleon Ash Dolphin G[...]

  • Страница 675

    56 Station equipment Table 1 Order codes for Meridian Modular Telephones and factory iktalled options (continued) Description Ordering code M2216ACP2 (basic-with ACD Display) Black Chameleon Ash Dolphin Gray M2216ACD-2 (with MPDA) NTZK23AA-03 (with power board) NTZK23AA-35 (with power board) NTZK23AA-93 (with power board) Black NTZK23AB-03 (with po[...]

  • Страница 676

    Station equipment 57 Table 2 Ordering codes for optional hardware Description Ordering code Additional requirements Meridian Progfammabie Data Adapter NT2K64WA Power Supply Board Display Module - Power Supply Board (M2008: Black NT2K24WA-03 Chameleon Ash NT2K24WA35 Dolphin Gray NT2K24WA-93 ACD Display Module Power Supply Board (M2008; Black NT2K25Y[...]

  • Страница 677

    58 Station equipment Table 2 Ordering codes for optional hardware (continued) Description Ordering code Additional requirements Double Key Module Footstand Black PO780203-03 Chameleon Ash PO78023535 Dolphin Gray PO780293-93 External Alerter Interface NT2K40WA Power Supply Board Power Supply Board NT2Kl OWA Transformer or closet power 120 V Transfor[...]

  • Страница 678

    Station equipment 59 : -.. Table 3 Ordering codes for miscellaneous items Description Card, Directory Number Black Chameleon Ash Dolphin Gray Card, key labels Lens, Directory Number Handset Ordering code PO665352 PO665352 PO652746 PO657709 PO652720 Black Chameleon Ash Dolphin Gray Handset cord, 2.7m. (9 ft) Black Chameleon Ash Dolphin Gray Handset [...]

  • Страница 679

    60 Station equipment Table 3 Ordering codes for miscellaneous items (continued) Ordering code Set User Guide (regular) Set Reference Card Display Module Reference Card Display Installation Sheet Meridian Programmable Data Adapter User Guide PO703991 PO704094 - PO704096 PO706836 PO705986 M2216ACD User Guide PO704747 ACD Reference Card PO705952 M2000[...]

  • Страница 680

    Station equipment 61 An asynchronous data option circuit board (NTlFO9) and data option power supply (NFS50220-04Ll) are available for the M2000 series digital telephones to provide for connecting data terminals to the sets. For additional information on these telephones, refer to M2000 Digital Telephones - Description, Installation, Operation, and[...]

  • Страница 681

    62 Station equipment - The M2250 is a digital version of the.Ml250, offering additional features. A digital link connects the M2250 to the switch. Refer to MI250 and M22.50 Attendant ConsoIes description (553-2201-117) for additional information. Attendant administration overlay template This plastic overlay is placed over the attendant console to [...]

  • Страница 682

    Station equipment 63 If QCW4E or later vintage is used, either a.QMT4C must be used or the QMT4A or QMT4B must be used as standalone cradles. QMTI 1 asynchronous/ synchronous interface module The Asynchronous/Synchronous Interface Module (AS&I) is similar to the QMT9 but provides added dialing capabilities and six data feature keys and associat[...]

  • Страница 683

    64 Station equipment QKKI handsfree remote powering kit This kit is used to modify SL- 1 telephone sets for use with the QUS 1 Logic handsfiee unit and to extend the SL-1 set operating range from 1830 m (6000 ft) to 2438 m (8000 ft). It requires a 24 V ac local transformer (ordered separately). This kit is field-installable inside a set. Refer to Q[...]

  • Страница 684

    Station equipment 65 - no supplementary power is required :: QSR2 venture 1 headset .>; .:: ‘L.. . ..~ _., 4 _ _ _ . .-., ._. .._ :I:--” This set is used in conjunction with the QKNl headset kit to provide head ._ . . telephone set operation. Refer to QSU-Telephone Sets, Add-On Modules, interface kits and Meridian Ml 000 Series Telephones de[...]

  • Страница 685

    66 Station equipment Telephones -Description, installation, operation, and maintenance (553-2201-l 10) for more information. - NTlFlOAA printed circuit board assembly and housing for M3000 ,-,. .c; _ .‘..F digital touchphone. Refer to Meridian h43000 Touchphone - 1. . __ “;.‘“.‘-,.: , Description, installation, operation, and ma@tenance ([...]

  • Страница 686

    Station equipment 67 separately in 2 m (7 ft), 4 m (14 ft), qr 7.5 m (25 ft) lengths for conversion of existing SL-1 sets. These assemblies are compatible only with the Teledapt jacks designed for the system. . . ., .-,’ l, . . :.; .; ” s”Tz$ ‘C ” ,’ Station equipment replaceable items Table 4 lists the individual parts of the station [...]

  • Страница 687

    68 Station equipment Table 4 Station equipment replaceable items Equipment GICW-Type Attendant Consoles 3CWl , QCW2 only QCW3, QCW4 only (see Note) M2006, M2008, M2016S, M2216, and M2616 sets Replaceable items Apparatus number Cover Assembly PO538435 Attendant Administration - c Overlay PO61 3887 Console Caps Package PO58631 2 Bezel PO567037 Bezel [...]

  • Страница 688

    Table 4 Station equipment replaceable items (continued) Station equipment 69 Equipment All Sets and Consoles Replaceable items Chameleon Ash Dolphin Gray Handset Cord (3.6 m/l 2 ft) Black Chameleon Ash Dolphin Gray Line Cord Card Holder Filler Plate Apparatus number AQ318327 A031 8330 A0274233 A0274243 A031 4423 A0346862 PO535652 PO523535 I Note: T[...]

  • Страница 689

    70 Station equipment Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154 .w ,: :[...]

  • Страница 690

    71 Cabling The cables are differentiated by the cabling method used. Two types of cables are available. Intra-UEM cables are cables that connect to different cards within a UEM, or cables that go to the I/O connector panels at the rear of the UEM. Intra-UEM cables are not shielded. These cables arc typically round and use bail locks or screws to pr[...]

  • Страница 691

    72 Cabling NT8D40AA AC power cord Purpose-This cable conducts AC power into the pedestal for AC systems. It is 9.1 m (30 ft) long. NT8D40AM module-to-module power harness Purpose--This power wiring harness is used in AC modules to connect the input AC power and speed control signals vertically through the column. It is constructed in a modular form[...]

  • Страница 692

    Cabling 73 NT8D46AD System Monitbr SDI cable PurpoeThis cable is used to connect an SD1 card to the System Monitor. ‘/ i-.:.2-, It replaces the NT8D46AA System Monitor column cable when the SD1 is :j 1 !..,.: ‘c;::!> . . . ...--..“.-.,i.i in the same UEM. - : :I NT8D46AG System Monitor to SDI paddle boar’d cable Purpose-This cable is use[...]

  • Страница 693

    74 Cabling NT8D46AP Extended System’ Monitor Serial Link cable Purpose-This cable is used to connect the System Monitor from one column to another. This cable is 7.6 m (25 ft) long. NT8D46AQ System Monitor to UPS (Exide) cable PurposeThis cable is used to connect the System Monitor to the Exide UPS. It is used for UPS monitoring. This cable is 13[...]

  • Страница 694

    Cabling 75 NT8D46AW System Monitor to QBL12 cable Purpose----This cable connects the System Monitor to the QBL12 battery distribution box. It is used to monitor the DC power plant. This cable is 9.7 m (32 ft) long. NT8D46DC Air Probe harness DC Purpose-The Air Probe harness DC is part of the Temperature Sensor Assembly and is used in DC systems. It[...]

  • Страница 695

    76 Cabling NT8D75 Clock Controller to Clock Controller cable Purpose-This cable is used to interconnect QF’C471 Clock Controller cards. This cable is available in the following lengths: - NT8D75AC 1.2 m (4 ft) - NT8D75AD 1.8 m (6 ft) NT8D76 Intergroup Switch to Inter Group cable Purpose-This cable is used to connect the QF’C412 Intergroup Switc[...]

  • Страница 696

    __i .I . . : . . . .: .: 1 ;::.> Y,’ :_:.:I ‘: ,...-. _. ,. .., I tI_ ..-. . ..I : -’ ‘. ; --; _I] i ._ .I .: ,:. ..i : 1.. :I ,..; r :-.. ... Cabling 77 NT8D78AA CPU cable - Purpose-This cable is used to connect the QPC580 CPU Interface card to QPC579 CPU Function card. This cable is 5 cm (2 in.) long. NT8D79 PRVDTI to Clock Controller [...]

  • Страница 697

    78 Cabling - NT8D80AF 3m(lOft) - NT8DSOAG 3.6 m (12 ft) - NT8D80A.I 4.8 m (16 ft) - NT8D80AL 6 m (20 ft) - NTSDSOAP 7.6 m (25 ft) NT8D81AA Tip and Ring cable Purpose-This cable is used to connect a line card to the I/O connector panel. This cable is 50 cm (20 in.) long. NT8D82 SDI to I/O cable Purpose-This cable is used to connect the the following[...]

  • Страница 698

    _: Cabling 79 NT8D84AA SDI paddle board (dual. port) to I/O cable Purpose-This cable is used to connect the NT8D41AA SD1 paddle board (dual port) to the I/O connector panel. This cable is 45.7 cm (18 in.) long. NT8D85 Network to PE cable Purpose-This cable is used to connect the following: - QPC58 1 CMA card to QPC58 1 CMA card in dual CPU configur[...]

  • Страница 699

    80 Cabling NT8D86 Network to I/O cable- Purpose!-This cable is used to connect the following to the I/O connector panel: - QPC414 Network card - PRIlDTIcard - QPC659 Dual Loop Peripheral Buffer card - NT8D47RPE This cable is available in the following lengths: - NT8D86AC 1.5 m (5 ft) - NT8D86AD 1.8 m (6 ft) NT8D87 Conference/TDS to music trunk cabl[...]

  • Страница 700

    Cabling 81 NT8D91 Network to Controller cable Purpose-This cable is used for internal cabling to connect NT8DO4 Superloop Network card to NT8DOlAD Controller-2 or NT8DOlAC Controller-4 card. This cable is available in the following lengths: - NT8D91AC 1.2 m (4 ft) - NT8D91AD 1.8 m (6 ft) - NT8D91AE 2.4 m (8 ft) - NT8D91AF 3 m (loft) - NT8D91AG 3.6 [...]

  • Страница 701

    82 Cabling - QPC513 Enhanced Se&l Data Interface - QPC841 Four-Port Serial Data Interface - QPC687 CPU with SDI/ RTC This cable is available in the following lengths: - - NT8D95A.I 4.8 m (16 ft) - NT8D95AT 10.3 m (34 ft) - NTSD95AW 14.6 m (48 ft) 97AX PRllDTl to MWDF cable Purpose-This cable connects the PRI/DTI card to the MDF via the I/O conn[...]

  • Страница 702

    Cabling 83 NT8D99 CPU to Network cable Purpose-This cable is used to:interconnect NT8D35 NET Modules in full group configuration This cable is available in the following lengths: - - NT8D99AR 0.6 m (2 ft) - NT8D99AC 1.2 m (4 ft) - NTm99AD 1.8 m (6 ft) NT9J93AD PRVDTI Echo Canceler to I/O cable Purpose-This cable is used to connect the PRI/DTI Echo [...]

  • Страница 703

    84 Cabling NT9J97 Intra-column Network cable Purpose-This cable is used to connect the NT8DO4AA Superloop Network card to the I/O connector panel in a QCA55 cabinet. This cable is available in the following lengths: - NT9J97AC 1 m (40 in.) - NT9J97AD 1.8 m (70 in.) - NT9J97AE 2.2 m (85 in.) - NT9J97AG 3.6 m (12 ft) - NT9J97AH 4.3 m (14 ft) - NT9J97[...]

  • Страница 704

    Cabling 85 QCADI 28 connector cable Purpose-Connects QPC472 DTI Carrier Interface (J5) connector to the cabinet filter panel. It is a 15-conductor flat ribbon cable with a U-pin D-type female connector at one end and a 15-pin D-type male connector at the other. QCAD274A AC power cord Purpose-This cable conducts AC power to the NT6D52AA rectifier. I[...]

  • Страница 705

    06 Cabling Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154[...]

  • Страница 706

    87 Miscellaneous equipment Field Wiring Kit System Hardware-All Purpose-The NT6D54AA Field Wiring Kit is used in conjunction with the System Monitor to QBLl5 cable. It provides the necessary hardware to connect four NT6D52AA rectifiers to a System Monitor. . . Blank Faceplates System Hardware-All Purpose-An NT7DOSAA blank faceplate is required in a[...]

  • Страница 707

    68 Miscellaneous equipment Note: This kit does not include the cable tray. Earthquake Bracing Kit System Hardware-All Purpose-Provides a means to hold together all modules that are stacked up in vertical expansion so that in the case of an earthquake, the whole column will move as a unit. Used only for non-raised floor. Each kit contains the follow[...]

  • Страница 708

    Miscellaneous equipment 89 Table 5 Order Numbers for BIX Designation Labels for NT8D13 PE Modules Description Color Order number Basic 500/2500 set labels (eight circuits per card). A set White PO641 810 of four labels for each PE shelf is used SL-1 set (eight circuits) Blue PO641 813 COIFXAVATS trunk (four circuits) Green PO641812 COIFXANATS trunk[...]

  • Страница 709

    90 Miscellaneous equipment Northern Telecom Publicatidns Northern Telecom Publications are packaged in standard Northern Telecom binders to support the various Meridian 1 systems. Title and description Qrder number Installation and maintenance guide - System options PO71 0530 21,51, 61, 71 Planning and engineering guide - System options 21, PO71 05[...]

  • Страница 710

    91 List of terms ACD Automatic Call Distribution ASIM Asynchronous/Synchronous Interface Module BPS Bits Per Second BTU Bus Terminating Unit CAS Centralized Attendant Service cc Clock Controller CE Common Equipment CMA Changeover Memory Arbitrator co Central Office CPU Central Processing Unit Equipment identification and ordering information 553-30[...]

  • Страница 711

    92 List of terms CRT DCE DCHI DID DTE DTl DTMF DTR EIA FDI FDU HSDC IGS I/O Cathode Ray Tube Data Communication Equipment D-Channel Handler Interface Direct Inward Dialing Data Terminal Equipment Digital Trunk Interface Dual Tone Multi Frequency Digitone Receiver Electronics Industry Association Floppy Disk Interface Floppy Disk Unit High-Speed Dat[...]

  • Страница 712

    List of terms 93 ISDLC Integrated Services Digital Line card Integrated Services Digital Network LRE Logic Return Equalizer MCDS Multi-Channel System MDF Main Distribution Frame MDU Multi-Disk Unit MSI Mass Storage Interface MSU Mass Storage Unit OAID Outgoing Automatic Incoming Dial b. . . . ,:,:y;.7.-. , . . , . . ; : .‘.,.,..” : ;; -.: OANI [...]

  • Страница 713

    94 List of terms PE Peripheral Equipment PRA Primary Rate Access PRI primary Rate Interface RAM RAN Random Access Memory Recorded Announcement ROM Read-Only Memory RPE Remote Peripheral Equipment SBE Segmented Bus Extender SCG System Clock Generator SDI Serial Data Interface TCM TDS Time Compression Multiplexing Tone and Digit Switch UEM Universal [...]

  • Страница 714

    List of terms 95 UPS Uninterruptable Power Supply 3-Port Extender Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154[...]

  • Страница 715

    SL-1 System options 21,51,61,71 Equipment identification and ordering information 0 1990 Northern Telecom All rights reserved. Information subject to change without notice. Release 1 .O Standard January 29, 1990 Printed in U.S.A. Et narthorn t~lacom . . . .[...]

  • Страница 716

    ti northtzrn telecom PRACTICE 553-2201-180 Issrzid: 88 01 27 Standard INTEGRATED SERVICES NETWORK MERIDIAN l SERIES DIGITAL TELEPHONES LINE ENGINEERING CONTENTS Note: The module indicated by a bullet (@) in the checklist has been revised. The reason for this revision is given in tbe first page of the af f acted module. Prinkd in U.S.A. ‘Northern [...]

  • Страница 717

    .:- . .[...]

  • Страница 718

    ITEM cxoooo l-P 0010 DP 1001 DP 1002 DP 1003 DP 1004 DP 1005 DP 1006 DP 1007 IX 9999 ISSUE Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard CHECKLIST pzizJFq DATE 86 06 05 86 06 05 86 01 27 86 01 27 86 01 27 86 01 27 86 01 27 86 01 27 86 01 27 86 01 27[...]

  • Страница 719

    [...]

  • Страница 720

    ENGINEER TELEPHONE LINE pjgFFJq NOTES Note: This module is reissued to change the minimum loop length requirement to 100 ft. and to add metric equivalents. (I) Cable pair selections must meet the following requirements: l AC signal loss must be less than 12.9 dB at 256 kHz due to all sources l DC loop resistance must be less than 175 Ohm l Minimum [...]

  • Страница 721

    -1 ENGINEER TELEPHONE LINE -[ 11 Select (another) loop that meets the criteria for cable length. (DP 1001) .[21-- . l Is there a bridge l . UP? l No l c31-. l Is there another . . loop available? l Yes l . . 0 . .7 Remove the bridge tap. cl step 5 Page 3 rl step 1 I[...]

  • Страница 722

    ENGINEER TELEPHONE LINE .[ 51 . .[61 . 0 Is the loop length l a Is there any 26 . . less than 2.1 kft? @No . AWG cable in the l No a l - loop? . . . .- . Yes l . . l - 0 a . Yes l L&l step 9 .[91- -[ 71 Calculate the loop resistance (DP 1002) .[ 81 0 l Is the resistance less 0 l than 175 Ohm? . No a . . l Is the PBXat the l l Doesthelooppass l [...]

  • Страница 723

    11 ENGINEER TELEPHONE LINE . [121 . . 0 . Is the Impulse noise- 0 within limits? (DP 1004) . No 0 . .I131 -. l Is the background l . noise within limits? l No 0 . l Install Meridian Digital Telephone and check &51-~ l Is the performance l rl step 1 Page 2 . . . . _ . . . . . “. I ,...- ._ . . . . . . .._,. _I . :,... : ..;: :‘. 1 ~’ ::[...]

  • Страница 724

    ENGINEER TELEPHONE LINE pz+Fffj . [ 161 . 0 Is there another pair l . available? . No . a . cl step 18 .Wl-. l Isthisthesecond l . time around? . No . . . 0 . 0 -[181 I Collect more detailed loop data and calculate EPL (DP 1006) l [ 191 . . Is EPL less than 12.0 . . dB? l No 0 . 0 c :[...]

  • Страница 725

    Install Meridian Digital Telephone and check performance if not l t211 I* l Is the performance l . OK? ’ No . . . . A- . . YSS --A step 22 . [22l . l Are the loop . l diagnostics and 0 noise measurement l Yes already done? . . a l 0 . No q!l step 21 Page 8 Perform loop diagnostics and noise measurements. (DP 1003, DP 1004 and . . Step 24 cl Page [...]

  • Страница 726

    ENGINEER TELEPHONE LINE -1 . [241 . l Are impulse noise l . and background . noise within limits? l Yes l Is the problem . l fixed? l No . . [261 -. .- 0 Is the performance l . OK? l No cl step 21 Page 8[...]

  • Страница 727

    -1 ENGINEER TET LINE -[2n Measure the dc loop resistance. (DP 1007) l [281 0 l Is the loop . 1[291-, Install new cable. resistance less than l 175 Ohm? . No . .- . r--E301 L, Measure loop insertion loss at 256 kHz. l [311 --J----. l Is the insertion loss 0 . less than 12.0 dB? l Yes . .:. . . . . ._ .i. .2 . ., . _ - .[...]

  • Страница 728

    ENGINEER TELEPHONE LINE p%JFffj Replace any under-carpet cable if insertion loss can be reduced. Install Meridian Digital Telephone and check . [341-. 0 Is the performance 0 . OK? l Yes . . . . . . . No --I [ 351 At this point there may be other problems as listed in Table 0010-A c[...]

  • Страница 729

    -1 ENGINEER TEL? LINE Table 0010-A POSSIBLE FAULTS l EM1 l Unrecorded bridge taps l Under-carpet cable l Split cable pairs l Impulse noise - not recorded due to speed limitations of the impulse counter. l Faulty telephone .- c[...]

  • Страница 730

    SELECT A LOOP -1 NOTES 0.01 The requirements for a Meridian Digital Telephone are that the loop be without bridge taps, and be less than 175 Ohm dc resistance. and less than 12.0 dB loss at 256 kHz. For a single gauge cable, the-length limits are 3000 ft for 22 and 24 AWG cable and D inside wiring, and 2100 ft for 26 AWG cable. 0.02 The allowable l[...]

  • Страница 731

    j. .t... . L.. :.fY : :,:.l:,:j[...]

  • Страница 732

    CALCULATE DC LOOP RESISTANCE pJ%$qy Chart 1002-l CALCULATE DC LOOP RESISTANCE STEP PROCEDURE 1 Calculate the dc loop resistance by adding the resistance of each cable section. Calculate the resistance of each cable section using the following formula (Cable resistances are given in Table 1002-A.): LRi = CRi X SLi where: l LRi = dc resistance for ca[...]

  • Страница 733

    CALCULATE DC LOOP RESISTANCE Table 1002-A CONDUCTOR RESISTANCE PER UNIT Gauge Ohm per loop kft Ohm per loop km E 83 52 218 173 22 33 109 19 16 54[...]

  • Страница 734

    PERFORM LOOP DIAGNOSTIC TESTS p&qFJy Chart 1 PERFORM LOOP DIAGNOSTIC TESTS APPARATUS: 01 Volt-Ohmeter (VOM) l 1 77 Cable Analyser or eqUiValent STEP PROCEDURE FOREIGN VOLTAGE TEST 1 Set the VOM range switch to a scale 60 Vdc/Vac or more. 2 Connect the VOM test probes to the loop at the line card or distributing frame. 3 Measure the dc and ac vo[...]

  • Страница 735

    PERFORM LOOP DIAGNOSTIC TESTS Chart 1 Continued PERFORM LOOP DIAGNOSTIC TESTS STEP P ROCEDURE CAPACITANCE UNBALANCE TEST 1 Using the 77 Cable Analyser or equivalent, measure the capacitance between the following points: l T and GND l R and GND Requirement: Difference between the two readings should be <0.002 microfarads. . . :.[...]

  • Страница 736

    MEASURE IMPULSE NOISE -1 Chart 1004-l MEASURE IMPULSE NOISE STEP PROCEDURE 1 Measure impulse noise on selected lines during busy hours. Use an NE-58B Noise measurement set, or equivalent. Note: The termination and weighting filter required are 135 Ohm and 100 kHz respectively. and the blanking interval 25 microseconds. 2 Using Figure 1004-L Determi[...]

  • Страница 737

    1 Page 2 of 2 1 1004 MEASURE IMPULSE NOISE 553-2201-180 1 DP Standard ) 86 01 27 1000 100 Loss in di3 Fig. 1004-l Maximum Allowable Impulse Noise Counts Versus Loop Loss s. ..: ...[...]

  • Страница 738

    MEASURE BACKGROUND NOISE -1 Chart 1005-l 1 Measure background noise on the loop using an NE-58B noise measuring set. Note: The weighting and termination to be used are 100 kHz flat and 135 Ohm respectively. 2 Reject the loop being tested if the background noise measured is not less than 5ldBrn. -[...]

  • Страница 739

    ..;:p. 1 :: : : .:] ‘:,-. .. .,i[...]

  • Страница 740

    COLLECT LOOP MAKEUP DATA AND CALCULATE EPL p%JFfg Chart 1006-l COLLECT LOOP MAKEUP DATA AND CALCULATE EPL (EXPECTED PULSE LOSS) STEP PROCEDURE 1 3 4 Determine junction loss. (Figure 1006-l) 5 Collect loop makeup data between the line card and the terminal, For each cable section, the data required is: the cable type (PIG or pulp) gauge length type [...]

  • Страница 741

    COLLECT LOOP MAKEUP DATA AND CALCULATE EPL Chart 1006-l Continued COLLECT LOOP MAKEUP DATA AND CALCULATE EPL (EXPECTED PULSE LOSS) STEP PROCEDURE 6 Reject loops whose expected pulse loss is not less than 12.0 dB. EXAMPLE Section 1: Mainframe bulkhead to DFl - 500m. 26 AWG PIC, underground Section 2: DFl to DF2 - 200m. 26 AWG PIC, inside Section 3: [...]

  • Страница 742

    COLLECT LOOP MAKEUP DATA AND CALCULATE EPL Table 1006-A CABLE ATTENUATION AT 256 KHZ AND 21.1 =‘C 170’ F)’ j j i.L:.::.:.-.., . .._ --..: :. 26 AWG 24 AWG 22 AWG 19 AWG ,, ,! r-;.~.-.;~.+; ““. :; ; ,.._. dB/kft dB/km dB/kft dB/km dB/kft dB/km dB/kft dB/km PIG 4.2 13.7 3.1 10.2 2.5 5.6 PULP .4.3 14.3 3.5 11.4 2.1 6.6 Table 1006-B ATTENUATI[...]

  • Страница 743

    COLLECT LOOP MAKEUP DATA AND CALCULATE EPL 7 , , , , , , , , , 6. 5 4 3- 2. 1 0 ““““I 20 L Cable Characteristic Impedance in Ohms Fig. 1006-l Junction Loss vs Cable Characteristic Impedance ,i ,. : : ‘: _. ,I . . . . . . a. ::-” : 3 ‘.. .,I . .[...]

  • Страница 744

    MEASURE DC LOOP RESISTANCE p%Jflg Chart 1007-l MEASURE LOOP RESISTANCE STEP PROCEDURE 1 Measure loop resistance using standard procedures. Note: The dc loop resistance limit of 175 Ohm should be reduced by 1 Ohm for each 1% of the total loop that is aerial cable.[...]

  • Страница 745

    .., . . .- -; .I :, ..:) . . . ./’ %.[...]

  • Страница 746

    TITLE CALCULATE DC LOOP RESISTANCE CHECKLIST COLLECT LOOP MAKEUP DATA AND CALCULATE EPL ENGINEER TELEPHONE LINE INDEX MEASURE BACKGROUND NOISE MEASURE DC LOOP RESISTANCE MEASURE IMPULSE NOISE PERFORM LOOP DIAGNOSTIC TESTS SELECT A LOOP PROCEDURE NUMBER DP 1002 CKoooo DP 1006 TP 0010 Ix 9999 DP lQo5 DP 1007 DP 1004 ,. DP1003 DP 1001 .-.... . ._. ; .[...]

  • Страница 747

    . . :[...]

  • Страница 748

    northem tdaconl PRACTICE 553-2201-182 Issued: 85 06 15 Standard INTEGRATED SERVICES NETWORK MERIDIAN SL-1% SUMMARY OF TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS CONTENTS PAGE 1. u-LAW TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS 2. A-LAW TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS 3. DTI LOSS TABLES Tables 1-A 1-B 1-C 1-D 1-E 1-F 1-G 1-H 1 -I 1-J 1-K 1-L 1-M 1-N 1-o 1-P 2-A 2-B 2-c 2-D 2-E 2-F 2-G 2-H 2-J 2[...]

  • Страница 749

    PRACTICE 553-2201-182 CONTENTS 3-A 3-B 3-c 3-D 1000 Hz Insertion Loss for ConnectIons between an Analog Port and a Digital Trunk Interface IDTI) Port 1000 Hz Insertion Loss for Connections’ between Two Ports of a Digital Trunk interface (DTI) _. 1000 Hz Insertion Loss for Connections between an Analog Port and a DigItal Trunk Interface IDTI) Port[...]

  • Страница 750

    PRACTICE 553 -2201-182 1. u-LAW TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS 1.01 The tables in this part provide the transmission requirements which Meridian SL-1 is destgned to meet or exceed in M-Law applications. The specified performance applies in the temperature range of 0 to 50° C. 1.02 Unless otherwise specified. all specifications are stated in terms of bein[...]

  • Страница 751

    PRACTICE 553-2201-182 Table 1-C OVERLOAD LEVELS TYPE OF CIRCUIT NOMINAL OVERLOAD LEVEL (dBm) RECEIVE (AID) TRANSMIT (D/A) Line Trunk Note: Receive and Transmit relate to Switch. Table 1-D TRACKING (LINEARITY) INPUT SIGNAL (dB) BELOW OVERLOAD TRACKING ERROR (dB) MAXIMUM AVERAGE +3 to -40 &OS i-o.25 . . -40 to -53 k1.0 +0.5 Note I: Signal at 1020[...]

  • Страница 752

    PRACTICE 553-2201-182 Table 1-F INPUT IMPEDANCE CONNECTION FROM REFERENCE FREQUENCY 4W TRUNK TO PORT IMPEDANCE RANGE Line 600 R 200-500 Hz 500-3400 Hz Trunk 600 R 200-500 Hz 500-1000 Hz 1000-3400 Hz Note 1: This parameter is for EIA-compatible trunks only. Note 2: A reference impedance of 600 R resistive is used. MINIMUM RETURN LOSS 20 dB 26 dB 20 [...]

  • Страница 753

    PRACTICE 553-2201-182 Table 1-I IMPULSE NOISE CONNECTION NUMBER OF COUNTS ABOVE 55 dBrnC AH 0 Note: For test purposes. a five-minute couiiting interval is used. Table 1-J INTERMODULATION DISTORTION CONNECTION TYPE DISTORTION LIMITS TEST SIGNAL (dB BELOW RECEIVED LEVEL) INPUT LEVEL R2 R3 (dBm) Line-to-Line 40 Line-to-Trunk 45 Trunk-to-Trunk 45 Note [...]

  • Страница 754

    PRACTICE 553-2201-182 Table 1-L QUANTIZATION DISTORTION - INPUT LEVEL SIGNAL/DISTORTION BELOW OVERLOAD RATIO (dB) +3 to -33 33 +I -33 to -43 27 -43 to -48 22 Note: Input signal is 1 kHz sinewave: output measured with C-message weighting. (See Table 1-C for overload definition.) 4 Table 1-M CROSSTALK CONNECTION MINIMUM CROSSTALK ATTENUATION (dB) Lin[...]

  • Страница 755

    PRACTICE 553-2201-182 Table 1-O RETURN LOSS (In-Service Requirements) CONNECTION FROM CIRCUIT ECHO LOW/HIGH NOTES 4W VNL TIE TERMINATION RETURN SINGING TRUNKTOTHE LOSS RETURN FOLLOWING: _ LOSS 4W VNL Tie Trunk (through balance) 4W legs of Hybrid terminated in 600/900R 21 20120 1.3 4W Non-VNL Tie Trunk 600/9OOrr + 2.16 (terminal balance) UF at dista[...]

  • Страница 756

    PRACTICE 553-2201-182 2. A-LAW TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS 2.01 The tables in this part provide the transmission requirements which Meridian SL-1 is designed lo meet on 95% of all connections in A-Law :;*; _ : -; .: ,. . . . . .. I .._. . . . .1 :’ .I ._ applications. z:i r, . . . Ijl,. : y.; ;y; Table 2-A INSERTION LOSS AT 820 HZ TYPE OF CONNECTION[...]

  • Страница 757

    PRACTICE 553-2201-182 Table 2-C RETURN LOSS (Design Requirements) CONNECTION ECHO RETURN LOSS (d8) SFRL LOSS id81 (300-3200 Hz) Line Interfaces: Line Side (Note 1) 4W Trunk Side (Note 2) 2W Trunk Interfaces: >18 >12 >21 >19 2W Trunk Side (Note 2) >22 >14 4W Trunk Side (Note 2) >21 >19 The design requirements in this table ar[...]

  • Страница 758

    PRACTICE 553-2201-182 Table 2-D RETURN LOSS (In-Service Requirements) CONNECTION FROM CIRCUIT ECHO LOW/HIGH NOTES 4W VNL TIE TERMINATION RETURN SINGING TRUNK TO THE LOSS RETURN FOLLOWING: LOSS 4W VNL Tie Trunk 4W legs of Hybrid (through balance) terminated in 600~ 21 20/20 I,3 c 4W Non-VNL Tie Trunk (terminal balance) 600R •k 2.16 ,AF at distant [...]

  • Страница 759

    PRACTICE 553-2201-182 Table 2-E DISTORTION AND MODULATION PRODUCTS DISTORTION TYPE INPUT LEVEL (d8) BELOW OVERLOAD INPUT MAXIMUM FREQUENCY/s LEVEL (Hz) OF DISTORTION (excluding PRODUCT submultiples of 8 kHz) Harmonic 3 700-1100 340 dB below fundamental output signal Intermodula- tion 13 300-3400 (see Note) a35 dB below fundamental output signal Sid[...]

  • Страница 760

    PRACTICE 553-2201-182 Table 2-G - ENVELOPE DELAY DISTORTION BANDWIDTH (Hz) ENVELOPE DELAY DISTORTION (,us) LINE-LINE LINE-TRUNK/ TRUNK-LINE/ TRUNK-TRUNK 1000 to 2600 380 190 1150 to 2300 300 150 800 to 2700 750 375 Note: The limits above apply to 95% of all connections. Table 2-H CROSSTALK CONNECTION CROSSTALK AlTENUATlON (dB) Line-to-Line >75 L[...]

  • Страница 761

    PRACTICE 553-2201-182 Table 2-K MESSAGE CIRCUIT NOISE CONNECTION NOISE LEVEL dl3mOp dBrn 3 kHz FLAT Line-to-Line Line-to-Trunk: G-65 ~29 (a) Trunk side (b) Line side Trunk-to-Trunk (2 dB pads out) 6-65 <29 ~-65 629 e-65 ~29 Table 2-L IMPULSE NOISE With all circuits at the MDF correctly terminated. the impulse noise measured at line terminals sho[...]

  • Страница 762

    PRACTICE 553-2201-182 Table 2-N ClUANTlZATlON DISTORTION - INPUT LEVEL SIGNAL/DISTORTION BELOW OVERLOAD RATIO (dB) 3 to 33 33 33 to 43 21 43 to 48 22 Note: Input signal is 820 Hz sinewave: output measured with psophometric weighting. (See Table 2-J for a definition of overload.) cl Page 2-7[...]

  • Страница 763

    [...]

  • Страница 764

    PRACTICE 553-2201-182 3. DTI LOSS TABLES +I 3.01 Tables 3-A through 3-D provide the insertion loss specifications of the SL-1 Business Communications System when it is equipped with a QPC472 Digital Trunk Interface (DTI). 3.02 The insertion loss for connections between analog ports of the SL-1 and the DTl or beteween DTI ports is connection-specifi[...]

  • Страница 765

    PRACTICE 553-2201-182 I+ Table 3-A 1000 Hz INSERTION LOSS FOR CONNECTIONS BEiWEEN AN ANALOG PORT AND A DIGITAL TRUNK INTERFACE (DTI) PORT TYPE OF ANALOG CONNECTION PORT DIGITAL PORT NOMINAL INSERTION LOSS (dB) Analbg port DTI to to DTI Analog port Station to Trunk Local Station Tie Trunk 3 9 Local Station CO/FX/WATS 3 3 Local Station Toll WATS (Not[...]

  • Страница 766

    PRACTICE 553-2201-182 Table 3-8 1000 Hz INSERTION LOSS FOR CONNECilONS BETWEEN.TWO PORTS +I OF A DIGITAL TRUNK INTERFACE (DTI) TYPE OF CONNECTION DIGITAL PORT (A) NOMINAL DIGITAL INSERTION LOSS (d8) PORT (B) - DTI port’ (A) DTI port (B) to DTI port (B) to DTI port (A) Trunk to Trunk Tie Trunk Tie Trunk 0 0 Tie Trunk CO/FX/WATS 6 0 Tie Trunk Toll [...]

  • Страница 767

    PRACTICE 553-2201-182 P Table 3-C 1000 Hz INSERTION LOSS FOR CONNECTIONS-BETWEEN AN ANALOG PORT AND A DIGITAL TRUNK INTERFACE (DTI) PORT FOR CONNECTIONS TO A SATELLITE PBX TYPE OF ANALOG CONNECTION PORT Station to Satellite Tie Trunk Local Station Local Station DIGITAL PORT (Note 1) Comb. STT Digital STT NOMINAL _ INSERTION LOSS (dB) Analog port DT[...]

  • Страница 768

    . PRACTICE 553-2201-182 Table 3-C Continued 1000 Hz INSERTION LOSS FOR CONNECTIONS BETWEEN AN ANALOG PORT AND A DIGITAL TRUNK INTERFACE (DTI) PORT FOR CONNECTIONS TO A SATELLITE PBX TYPE OF ANALOG CONNECTION PORT DIGITAL PORT - (Note 1) NOMINAL INSERTION LOSS (d8) Analog port DTI to to DTI Analog port STT-ESN STT-ESN CO/FX/WATS 0.5 0.5 Toll WATS (N[...]

  • Страница 769

    PRACTICE 553 -2201-182 r Table 3-D 1000 Hz INSERTION LOSS FOR CONNECTIONS BiTWEEN TWO PORTS OF A DIGITAL TRUNK INTERFACE (DTI) FOR CONNECTIONS TO A SATELLITE PBX TYPE OF CONNECTION DIGITAL DIGITAL PORT PORT (A) (8) (Note 1) (Note 1) NOMINAL INSERTION LOSS (dB) DTI port (A) DTI port (B) to DTI port (B) to DTI port (A) Satellite Trunk to Trunk Comb. [...]

  • Страница 770

    SL-1 System options 21,51,61,71 Analog line card description Standard nit norf horn tulacom Meridian I[...]

  • Страница 771

    .[...]

  • Страница 772

    SL-1 System options 21,51,61,71 Analog line card description Publication number: 553-3001-l 61 Document release: 1 .O Document status: Standard Date: January 29,199O - 0 1990 Northern Telecom All rights reserved. Analog line card description 553-3001-l 61 . . . . . .[...]

  • Страница 773

    ii Revision history January 29,199O Standard, release 1 .O Analog line card description 553-3001-l 61[...]

  • Страница 774

    iii About this document This practice outlines the characteristics, application, and operation of the NTI3DO3AB Analog Line Card. The information is intended to be used as a guide when connecting customer-provided apparatus to the line circuit. New naming conventions are applied to this release. The following documents should be used as references [...]

  • Страница 775

    iv About this document - XII software management (553-3001-300) - XII features and services (553-3001-305) See the SL-I XII input/output guide (553-3001-400) for a description of alI administration programs, maintenance programs, and system messages. See the following Northern Telecom Publications for references to specific telephone sets: - Meridi[...]

  • Страница 776

    V Contents General information Application 2 Characteristics 3 Functional I. 3 Technical summary 4 Analog line interface 4 Input impedance 4 Insertion loss 4 Frequency response 4 Message channel noise 5 Power requirements 6 Foreign and surge voltage protections , 6 Overload level 6 Analog line card description 553-3001-l 61 . . :[...]

  • Страница 777

    vi Contents Analog line card description 553-3001-l 61[...]

  • Страница 778

    General information 1 This publication outlines the characteristics, application and operation of the Analog Line Card. The information is intended to be used as a guide when connecting customer-provided apparatus to the line circuit. The following Analog Line Card is available: - NT8DO3AB - Analog Line Card (p-Law) The Analog Line Card provides ta[...]

  • Страница 779

    2 Summary Application - The line circuit interfaces and is compatible with the equipment listed in Table 1. Table 1 Line circuit application and compatibility Equipment Specifications NE-500 type rotary dial sets (or equivalent) Dial Speed 8.0 to 22.5 pps Percent Break 58 to 70% Interdigital Time 240 ms NE-2500 type Digitone sets (or equivalent) Fr[...]

  • Страница 780

    Summarv 3 Characteristics Functional The Analog Line Card contains an 8050 microprocessor that provides the following functions: - card self-identification - self-test - control card operation - status report to the controller - diagnostics for maintenance purposes The Analog Line Card also provides the following: . . - 6OOQ balanced terminating im[...]

  • Страница 781

    4 Summary Technical summary Analog line interface Input impedance The impedance at tip and ring is 600 Ohm with a return loss of 20 dB for 200-500 Hz 26 dl3 for 500-3400 Hz Insertion loss On a station line-to-line conkction, the total insertion loss at 1 KHz is 6dB + 1dB. This is arranged as 3.5dB loss for analog to PCM and 2.5dB loss for PCM to an[...]

  • Страница 782

    Summary 5 Message channel noise The message channel noise C-weighted (dBmC) on 95% of the connections (line to line) with both ends terminated in 600 ohms does not exceed 20 dBmC. A technical summary of the Analog line c&it pack is’given in Table 3. Table 3 Technical summary of Analog Line Card Impedance: 600!2 Loop limit (excluding set) 1000[...]

  • Страница 783

    6 Summary Power requirements - NT8D03AB The NlSDO3AB Analog Line Card has the following power requirements: 1 Voltage Tolerance Idle Active - Max (+/-I Current Current + 150Vdc 0.50 V dc 48 ma Oma 48 ma + 8.5 Vdc l.OOVdc 150 ma 8ma 280 ma - 48.0 V dc 2.40 V dc 48 ma 40 ma 688 ma - 48.0 V dc 2.40 V dc Oma (1)lOma 320ma 86.0 V ac 5.00 V ac Oma (2) 10[...]

  • Страница 784

    :.. I . -8.. -... . . :1 -,_.-..- ., :: ‘.- .- ! ,,’ . . : :.:[...]

  • Страница 785

    .- SL-1 System Options 21,51,61,71 Analog line card description Copyright Q 1990 Northern Telecom All rights reserved. Information subject to change without notice. Release 1 .O Standard January 29,199O Printed in U.S.A. n# nartharn tolocom .J I[...]

  • Страница 786

    I; _ .I _., _... . ,.-.. ,, ., .-. ,. . __ I- ,.... . L:i :. I , .“,:: .I : .,.-y . I ‘. _.: ..; . . ,. _ ; :.‘T :‘. ,’ .’ ; SL-1 System options 21,51,61,71 Digital line card description Standard Et northorn fdocom Meridian1 ..x .:[...]

  • Страница 787

    . . .: :. . ..:.; .1 . . _ ., ..: : ,J[...]

  • Страница 788

    SL-1 System options 21,51,61,71 Digital line card description- Publication number: 5533001-l 62 Document status: Standard Document release: 1 .O Date: January 29,199O . . ,..’ 0 1990 Northern Telecom All rights reserved. Digital line card description 553-3001-l 62[...]

  • Страница 789

    ii Revision history Januaty29,1990 First issue of this document. Digital line card description 553-3001-l 62 s. :[...]

  • Страница 790

    About this document iii This practice outlines the characteristics, application, and operation of the NTt3DO2AA Digital Line Card (Dgtl LC). The information is intended tc be used as a guide when connecting customer-provided apparatus to the line circuit. New naming conventions are applied to this release. The following documents should be used as [...]

  • Страница 791

    iv About this document - XII Software Management (553-3001-300) - Xl1 Features and Services (553-3001-305) See the SL-I XII Input/Output Guide (553-300140) for a description of all administration programs, maintenance proms, and system messages. See the following Northern Telecom Publications for references to specific telephone sets: - Meridian M2[...]

  • Страница 792

    V Contents General information Requirements 1 1 Description Meridian SL-1 data block Physical Functional Configuration Power supply to digital telephones 3 3 . . 3 4 4 4 Characteristics - 5 Digital line card description 553-3001-l 62[...]

  • Страница 793

    vi Contents Digital line card description 553-3001-l 62[...]

  • Страница 794

    General information The NT8DO2AA Digital Line Card (Dgtl LC) is based on the design of the QPC578 Integrated Services Digital Line Card. See 553-2201-193 for a complete description of the QPC578. The Dgtl LC is a voice and data communication link between the Meridian SL-1 switch and modular digital telephones. When a digital telephone is equipped w[...]

  • Страница 795

    2 General information Digital line card description 553-3001-l 62[...]

  • Страница 796

    ! ,’ _.: .::. :i .I .: -:;; ::: _. _ c _ . , 5 T 7’; : _’ .- 3 Description The NT8DO2AA Digital Line Card (Dgtl LC) is equipped with 16 identical line circuits housed within an NTSD37AA Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module (IPE). Each line circuit provides a multiplexed voice, data, and signaling path to and from digital apparatus over a a[...]

  • Страница 797

    4 Description Functional The Dgtl LC contains an 8050 microprocessor that provides the following functions: - card self-identification - self-test - control card operation - status report to the controller - diagnostics for maintenance purposes Configuration Up to 16 Dgd LC circuit packs can be mounted in one PE shelf if the remaining slots are not[...]

  • Страница 798

    5 Characteristics Table 1 Digital Llne Card circuit characteristics Characteristics Description Circuits per pack Options Impedance Loop limits 16 voice, 16 data Nil 1008 . . 100 ft (30 m) to 3000 ft (900 m) with 24 AWG PVC cable kl5 VDC at 80 mA)l 0 to 3500 ft (1067 m) with 24 AWG PVC cable &15 VDC at 80 mA)] Digital line card description 553-[...]

  • Страница 799

    6 CharacterisGcs Table 1 continued Digital Line Card circuit characteristics I dharacteristlcs Description Line rate 512kbps&lOOppm Power supply + 5vdc *15vdc +lOVdc Transmitter output voltage -successive “1” bits -“On bits +1.5&0.15Vand-1.5kO.15V 0*50mV Note: The Dgtl LC requires +lW, - lSV, and +5V from the backplane. Digital line c[...]

  • Страница 800

    [...]

  • Страница 801

    . . SL-1 System options 21,51,61,71 Digital line card description 8 1990 Northern Telecom All rights reserved. Information subject to change without notice. Release 1 .O Standard January 29, 1990 Printed in U.S.A. r%t northarn talocom[...]

  • Страница 802

    SL-1 System options 21, &, 61,71 Analog message waiting line card description Standard Et northern tWocam[...]

  • Страница 803

    [...]

  • Страница 804

    SL-1 System options 21,51,61,71 Analog message waiting line card description Publication number: 553-3001-l 63 Document release: 1 .O Document status: Standard Date: January 29,199O 0 1990 Northern Telecom All rights reserved. Analog message waiting line card, description 553-3001-l 63 . .’ : .I.’ : -.[...]

  • Страница 805

    ii Revision history January 29,199O Standard, release 1.0 Analog message waiting line card description 553-3001-t 63[...]

  • Страница 806

    :,j .‘,:;I’? ,-.. ., . . . . -1 ,...- _.... ,..- . .._ j y -::- _. 1 : :: : :. ‘; ., iii About this document This practice outlines the characteristics, application, and operation of the NTsDO9AB Analog Message Waiting Line Card. The information is intended to be used as a guide when connecting customer-provided apparatus to the line circuit.[...]

  • Страница 807

    iv About this document - Xl1 softwure management (553-3001-300) - Xl1 features and services (553-3001-305) See the SL-1 XII input/output guide (553-3001-400) for a description of all administration programs, maintenance programs, and system messages. See the following Northern Telecom Publications for references to specific telephone sets: - Meridi[...]

  • Страница 808

    V Contents General information 1 Application 3 Characteristics Functional 5 . . 5 Technical summary Analog line interface Input impedance Insertion loss Frequency response Message channel noise Power requirements Foreign and surge voltage protections Overload level -- 7 7 7 7 7 8 9 9 9 Analog message waiting line card description 553-3001-l 63[...]

  • Страница 809

    vi Contents Analog message waiting line card description 553-3001-l 63 . . .’[...]

  • Страница 810

    General information 1 This publication outlines the characteristics, application, and operation of the Analog Message Waiting Line Card. The information is intended to be used as a guide when connecting customer-provided apparatus to the line circuit. The following Analog Message Waiting Line Card is available: - NT8DO9AB - Analog Message Waiting L[...]

  • Страница 811

    2 General information .- ., . . . e%. .::. . .-. ,_.. .., i: :: : ::y., : ..,.. :..; Analog message waiting line card description 553-3001-l 63 C.[...]

  • Страница 812

    3 Application The line card interfaces and is compatible with the equipment listed in Table 1. Table 1 Line card application and compatibility Equipment Specifications NE-500 type rotary dial sets (or equivalent) Dial Speed 8.0 to 12.5 pps Percent Break 58 to 70% Interdigital Time 240 ms NE-2500 type Digitone sets (or equivalent) Frequency Accuracy[...]

  • Страница 813

    4 Application Analog message waiting line card description 553-3001-l 63 .[...]

  • Страница 814

    Characteristics 5 Functional The Analog Message Waiting Line Card contains a microprocessor that provides the following functions: - card self-identification - self-test - control card operation - status report to the controller - diagnostics for maintenance purposes -- The Analog Message Waiting Line Card also provides the following: - 6OfIQ balan[...]

  • Страница 815

    6 Characteristics - correct initialization of all features at power-up - connection of -150 Vdc at 1 Hz to activate message waiting lamps - direct reporting of digit dialed (500 sets) by collecting dial pulses - detection of lamp status - disable/enable-selected circuits for maintenance Analog message waiting line card description 553-3001-l 63 . .[...]

  • Страница 816

    7 : ,.... .: -...:- _‘. . . .: . , ., ._ I; : .: .,:- ;. r’::, .: Technical summary Analog line interface Input impedance The impedance at tip and ring is 600 Ohm with a return loss of 20 dB for 200-500 Hz 26 dl3 for 500-3400 Hz Insertion loss On a station line-to-line connection, the total insertion loss at 1 KHz is 6dB + 1dB. This is arranged[...]

  • Страница 817

    8 Technical summary Message channel noise- The message channel noise C-weighted (dBmC) on 95% of the connections (line to line) with both ends terminated in 600 ohms does not exceed 20 dEImC. A technical summary of the line card is given in Tible 3. Table 3 Technical summary of Analog Message Waiting Line Card impedance: 6oQsz Loop limit (excluding[...]

  • Страница 818

    Technical summarv 9 Power requirements - NT8DOSAB The NT8DO9AR Analog Message Waiting Line Card has the following power requirements: Table 4 Power requirements Voltage (+/-I + 12.0Vdc + 8.0 Vdc - 48.0 Vdc - 48.0 Vdc 88.0 V ac -150.0 V dc Tolerance Idle Active current current 0.36 V dc 48 ma Oma 8ma 40 ma (1) 10 ma (2) 10 ma 2ma 1 Max 48 ma 280 ma [...]

  • Страница 819

    SL-1 System options 21,51,61,71 Analog message waiting line card description Copyright 0 1990 Northern Telecom All rights reserved. Information subject to change without notice. Release 1 .O Standard January 29,199O Printed in U.S.A. rEt nartharn talaccrm C.[...]

  • Страница 820

    PRACTICE 553-2201-184 Issued: 84 01 20 Standard IKTEGRATED SERVICES NETWORK MERIDIAN SL-1. SL-1 LINE AND CONSOLE LINE PACKS DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION c c CONTENTS PAGE 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. GENERAL DESCRIPTION Functions .._ Physical Description Interconnection with Shelf Power Supply to Terminals l-l 2-l 2-1 2-l 2-2 2-2 CIRCUIT CHARACTERISTICS 3-1 OPERATI[...]

  • Страница 821

    r . . --[...]

  • Страница 822

    PRACTICE 553-2201-184 1. GENERAL 1.01 This practice outlines the functions, interconnections, characteristics and operation of the SL-1 Business Communications System, SL-1 Line and Console Line circuit packs. The information is intended to be used as a guide when designing or engineering the connection of apparatus to the line circuit. 1.02 The in[...]

  • Страница 823

    .-[...]

  • Страница 824

    PRACTICE 553 -2201-184 2. DESCRIPTION FUNCTlONS 2.01 The SL-1 and console line circuit packs each contain eight line circuits (see Fig. 2-l). The SL-1 line pack can use all eight circuits, each circuit interfacing to an SL-1 set. The console line pack uses pairs of line circuits to interface to attendant consoles: one pair may be used from the uppe[...]

  • Страница 825

    PRACTICE 553-2201-184 I- Printed Circuit Board L Common Circuitry Connector With 2 Rows of 40 Pins Each for Shelf Connections Circuits Fig. 2-l Identification of the Circuits on the Board INTERCONNECTION WITH SHELF 2.06 The IO-pin connector on the rear of the circuit pack connects to an 80-line bus system at the rear of the PE shelf. The bus lines [...]

  • Страница 826

    PRACTICE 553-2201-184 Fig. 2-2 Line Circuit Connection to SL-1 Set - I I I J ..:..-.. :-..I, ~ : ~ :_ I:i ,f Fig. 2-3 Line Circuit Connection to Attendant Console Page 2-3[...]

  • Страница 827

    -- . . :[...]

  • Страница 828

    PRACTICE 553-2201-184 3. CIRCUIT CHARACTERISTICS _ 3.01 The circuit characteristics of the line pack are listed in Table 3-A. Table 3-A CIRCUIT CHARACTERISTICS OF THE LINE PACK SIGNALING PAIR Mode Rate Level AUDIO PAIR Mode CHARACTERISTICS CIRCUITS PER PACK OPTIONS IMPEDANCE Voice Pair Signaling Pair NOMINAL INSERTION LOSS LOOP LIMITS AS RELATED TO[...]

  • Страница 829

    PRACTICE 553-2201-184 Table 3-A Continued CIRCUIT CHARACTERISTICS OF THE LINE PACK- CHARACTERISTICS AS RELATED TO THE CIRCUIT PACK PHANTOMED POWER 30 +l V divided as: Audio Pair Level +15 kO.05 v Signaling Pair Level -15 *0.05 v POWER INPUT FROM SHELF f6, -6, +2.5 V, BACKPLANE 30 V dc balanced _.... _^, 5 ‘,_ -1 .’ ‘, Page 3-2 Reissued, 85 06[...]

  • Страница 830

    PRACTICE 553-2201-184 4. OPERATION WITH SL-1 SET CALL ORIGINATED FROM AN SL-1 SET I / . . _ , -: I . . 7.’ ..!, ,_.,..-,.. : IDLE CIRCUIT STATES 4.01 SL-1 Set On-Hook. Multiplex control generates and sends scan message to SL-1 set (2.5 ms message every 10 ms). Message is sent via the signaling pair and hybrid transformer (Fig. 4-l). (1) Message d[...]

  • Страница 831

    PRACTICE 553-2201-184 CALL TO SL-I SET Page 4-2 (14) CE detects dialing and removes dial tone at start of dialing. (15) CE encodes dialed information. (16) Ringback tone on the dam output bus is applied to SL-1 set over audio pair during message time slot assigned by CE (busy tone received if called number is busy). 4.03 Talking Connection. Called [...]

  • Страница 832

    PRACTICE 553-2201-184 SL-1 Terminal set --------------- I SL-1 Line Circuit II 1 d-ky Audio Pair Hybrid Transformer I I j,” Digital-to- - Analog Filter I - Codec [Codec 1 Enable 1 l L--------------J Audio--t(=r----SL-,LineCiCcuit,----l Signaling* a ------------- _1 (=I--------- ----- ( 1 ll SL-1 Line Circuit 2 c=r---- ---A--- ( --I 1 SL-1 Line Ci[...]

  • Страница 833

    PRACTICE 553-2201-184 I - AMPLIFIER SSD TRANSFORMER . AUDIO PAIR SIGNALING PAIR 2.37 Kbps Fig. 4-2 SL-1 Line Circuit Connected to Basic SL-1 Set Page 4-4[...]

  • Страница 834

    PRACTICE 553-2201-184 BASIC ATTENDANT CONSOLE - , LED n SPEAlER 1 ATTENDANT 1 I I HANDSET ! 1 HEADSET 1 ( , OR f++j ;U$;; q TR:ki%MERt”“‘“‘““I 1 1 NETWORK I‘ , VOLUME, BUZZ 1 ‘-f- SIGNALING + HYBRID PAIR 1 TRANSFORMER - X’ 2.37.Kbps CONTROL I . 1 ClCLIAI IUI- A TIMING AMPLIFIER , .JI”I.-LII.v HYBRID PAIR 2 SSD AND (4) 4 CLOCK [...]

  • Страница 835

    PRACTICE 553-2201-184 4.06 Terminal Answers. SSD in SL-1 set sends off-hook signaling to line (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) circuit on signaling pair. Off-hook signaling data on data input bus during time slot 0 (via multiplex control and buffer). CE detects signaling. CE changes visual signaling on data output bus during time slot 0. Visual signaling is app[...]

  • Страница 836

    PRACTICE 553-2201-184 5. DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS FOREIGN AND SURGE VOLTAGE PROTECTION 5.01 When telephone lines connected to the line circuit are exposed to foreign voltages by direct contact or induction (e.g., power line crosses or lightning), protection devices must be installed on the customer’s premises. These devices must be capable of provid[...]

  • Страница 837

    . :: ‘.[...]

  • Страница 838

    rut northern tukcom PRACTICE 553-2201-183 Issued: 88 08 10 Standard INTEGRATED SERVICES NETWORK MERIDIAN SL-i. 500/2500 LINE PACKS DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION CONTENTS PAGE 1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._..... 1-1 2. DESCRIPTION 2-1 3. APPLICATION 3-1 4. CHARACTERISTICS 4-1 Functional ..,.,....._..,,[...]

  • Страница 839

    .[...]

  • Страница 840

    PRACTICE 553-2201-183 1. GENERAL 1.01 This practice outlines the characteristics, application and operation of the 500/2500 line circuit packs. The information is intended to be used as a guide when connecting customer-provided apparatus to the line circuit. 1.02 The following 500/2500 line packs are availadle: . QPC192 - Off-Premise Extension (OPX[...]

  • Страница 841

    --[...]

  • Страница 842

    PRACTICE 553-2201-183 2. DESCRIPTION 2.01 All versions of the 500/2500 line packs provide talk battery and signaling for regular 2-wire common battery SOO-type (rotary dial), 2500-type (DIGITONE* dial) telephones and key telephone equipment. The various special versions serve additional purposes as described in Part 4. 2.02 The line circuit packs m[...]

  • Страница 843

    [...]

  • Страница 844

    PRACTICE 553-2201-183 3. APPLICATION 3.01 The line circuit interfaces and is compatible with the equipment listed in Table 3-A. Table 3-A LINE CIRCUIT APPLICATION AND COMPATIBILITY EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS NE-500 TYPE ROTARY DIAL SETS (or equivalent) Dial Speed Percent Break Interdigital Time NE-2500 TYPE DIGITONE SETS (or equivalent) Frequency Acc[...]

  • Страница 845

    -- .i : : . .[...]

  • Страница 846

    PRACTICE 553-2201-183 4. CHARACTERISTICS FUNCTIONAL Common Features 4.01 The following features are provided: l 6000 balanced terminating impedance Unique Features .A.:: . ._ .: :. ::.::.:., l -48 V through a battery feed resistance and ground l supervise the loop current to determine on-hook/off-hook status l ringing current to the loop l isolatio[...]

  • Страница 847

    PRACTICE 553-2201183 Page 4-2 . l generate diagnostics ‘an “ERROR 500” message when the Message Waiting lamp is defective or the telephone is unplugged provided -150 V is present. If -150 V is missing (blown fuse) no message is generated under any condition. 4.05 QPC681 and QPC682 Parallel Message Waiting Line packs: l provides the same featu[...]

  • Страница 848

    PRACTICE 553-2201-183 TECHNICAL SUMMARY 4.09 A technical summary of the line circuit pack is given in Table 4-A. Table 4-A TECHNICAL SUMMARY OF LINE CIRCUIT PACK Impedance: QPC452/521, QPC494/558 QPC594/129/189, QPC681/682 QPC192/292 QPC532 600 R 600 R 900 n 600 R, matches 3-component complex impedances + Loop Limit (excluding set): QPC192/292 All [...]

  • Страница 849

    PRACTICE 553-2201-183 p LIMITATIONS 4 POWER REQUIREMENTS Page 4-4 4.10 The maximum number of Ringers that can be connected to DN loop is shown below: MAXIMUM NUMBER OF RINGERS LOOP QPC452lQPC494 QPC594/QPC789 RESISTANCE QPC521/QPC558 -QPC729 1000 2 850 3 i 600 i 4 350 4 Note: Loop resistance excludes impedance of telephone sets. 4.11 Supervision li[...]

  • Страница 850

    PRACTICE 553-2201-183 4.14 The-WC494 and QPC558. packs have the following typical power requirements: VOLTAGE -150 v, +5% +2.5 V, +0.5% +6 V, +l% -6 V, +l% -48 v, +3% +52 V, +4% IDLE CURRENT (mA) 0 <O.l 50 50 1 1 ACTIVE CURRENT (mA) 30 co.1 140 ~~ a5 4.15 The QPC532 pack has the following typical power requirements: VOLTAGE IDLE CURRENT ACTIVE C[...]

  • Страница 851

    PRACTICE 553-2201-183 P Note 2: The Meridian SL-1 S QPC501. optional backplane is equipped with only 8 slots. 4.18 When the QPC594, QPC729 or QPC789 Quad Density line card is used with the QPC659 (note) Dual Loop buffer, there are no restrictions to the number of packs in a Dual Loop shelf. Note: In cabinets equipped with QSD65.Dual Loop shelves, o[...]

  • Страница 852

    PRACTICE 553-2201-183 5. OPERATION 5.01 This part contains signaling and supervision operations which apply to the line circuit during various states of operation. Refer to Fig. 5-l for a block diagram of a typical 500/2500 line circuit, Fig. 5-2 for a block diagram of the QPC192 and QPC292 packs, and Fig. 5-3 for a block diagram of the QPC594, QPC[...]

  • Страница 853

    PRACTICE 553-2201-183 (12) Ringback tone on the data output bus is applied to telephone during message time slot assigned by CE (busy tone received if called number is busy). 5.04 Talking Connection. (1) Called party answers. (2) Ringback tone removed by CE. (3) rp;m~ message time slot,. digital ,voice on data output bus is to telephone via multrpl[...]

  • Страница 854

    PRACTICE 553-2201-183 (3) Ring &ntrol signal is removed.. Relay Kl is deenergized. (4) Ringing voltage is removed from called telephone. (5) Multiplex control sends off-hook signaling data to CE on the data input bus during time slot 0. (6) CE detects signaling. (7) ztt ymoves ringing signaling on the data output bus during time 5.08 Talking Co[...]

  • Страница 855

    PRACTICE 553-2201-183 GROUNDBUTTON OPERATION (5) The off-hook condition is detected by the line circuit and the lamp control removes the -150 V from the tip and ring of the telephone. The message waiting lamp is deactivated. (6) Telephone goes on-hook. (7) The on-hook condition is detected by the line circuit,, the lamp control places -150 V on the[...]

  • Страница 856

    :‘.?.. ^ ._-. . ._. -.,...-.. y..,-. M.,‘...,-;:: .._ .: . . PRACTICE 553-2201-183 CLASS OF SERVICE AND FEATURES 5.14 All calls originating from and, terminating on stations connected to line and trunk circuits may be controlled with or without attendant assistance. Call restrictions to the exchange network and special services are assigned thr[...]

  • Страница 857

    PRACTICE 553-2201-183 TO 5001 2500 T-. set : l-4-- Audio and Signaling PCWN Phantomed Over These Leads l+l _ 2-Wire ---* A’D Filter - TO LB& ,Kl 4-Wire c Conversion D/A + Filler + . Superimposed on -48 Vdc from backplane i Ring Control I r- ------------------------------- i c--------------------------------- T-i 500/2500 Line Circuit 1 I Fl+ [...]

  • Страница 858

    PRACTICE 553-2201-183 TO 5001 2500 T-. set I R-’ Audio and Signaling Power 2-Wire ---* A’D Filler TO CWh Conversior DIA - Filter On LP DETR OMS51A r_-----_--~--~--~--~---~--~-~~~-~~~ T-i 50012500 Line Circuit 1 I R-i I L I -------------------------------A T 1:-------------------------------- 600/2500 Line Clrcult 2 R-i L- i --------------------[...]

  • Страница 859

    PRACTICE 553-2201-183 P . TO 5001 2500 Set T- R- . Audio and Signaling POWN Phantomed Over These Leads ________________________________________----------------------~-------. 500/2500 Line Clrcult 0 600 n x TO 600 Cl Kl, 4-Wire Conversion DIA - Filter 6 Enab on 46 Vdc Ring Control - Control - .______ -_. _----------_-__---~_-------~~~~~~~~ ‘1 500[...]

  • Страница 860

    nit northern ttdocom PRACTICE 553-2201-193 Issued: 87 08 31 Standard INTEGRATED SERVICES NETWORK MERIDIAN SL-I.. QPC578 INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL LlNE CARD DESCRIPTION CONTENTS PAGE 1. QPC578 INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL LINE CARD . . l-l Description :.. l-1 Functions .._......... l-2 Reason for Reissue: This practice is reissued to add further re[...]

  • Страница 861

    ,.., .i. “‘;;.:-.7;;. :, . ..I. _. : j . . . . ...) I .[...]

  • Страница 862

    PRACTICE 553-2201-193 1. QPC578 INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL LINE CARD Description .; : . 1’..... i ,_:_:., ,.. . I .I,.“.’ ./ 1.01 The QPC578 Integrated Services Digital Line Card (ISDLC) is a voice and data communication link between a Meridian SL-1 and the Meridian M2000/M3000 series of digital telephones. When a digital telephone is equipp[...]

  • Страница 863

    PRACTICE 553-2201-193 1.05 Meridian SL-i Data Block. Each digital telephone and each associated data terminal is assigned a separate Terminal Number (TN) in the Meridian SL-1 data base. Functions Page l-2 1.06 Physical. ISDLC circuitry is contained on a 320 mm (12.5 in) by 254 mm (10 in) printed circuit board. The faceplate of the pack is equipped [...]

  • Страница 864

    PRACTICE 553 -2201-193 Typical ISDLC Cabling and Cross-Connections (c) (d) (e) (f) Converts the Meridian SL-1 bit interleaved data format to DS-30X+ format and vice versa. 4- Converts Meridian SL-1 SSD (signaling) messages to TCM format and vice versa. Synchronizes the digital telephones and their data options to-the Meridian SL-1. Provides bufferi[...]

  • Страница 865

    PRACTICE 553-2201-193 Multiplexes-8 integrated voice and data TCM lines into a 2.56 Mbps DS-30X formatted data stream (used internally in the pack) when the transmission is from the digital telephone or associated terminal to the Meridian SL-1. De-multiplexes the 2.56 Mbps DS30X formatted data stream into 8 integrated voice and data TCM line-s when[...]

  • Страница 866

    PRACTICE 553-2201-193 l If required, packetizes several SD messages into one DS-30X message. (e) Receive /1Processor. The Receive ~Processor receives incoming signaling messages from digital telephones, via the Set Gate Array and: l Converts incoming DS30X signaling messages to SSD message format. l Will repacketize a long message into several SSD [...]

  • Страница 867

    PRACTICE 553-2201-193 Table 1-A ISDLC CIRCUIT CHARACTERISTICS CHARACTERISTICS DESCRIPTION circuits per pack options impedance 8 voice/data nil 100 R I+loop limits -QPC578A ,and B 100 (30 m) to 3000 feet (900 m) with 24 AWG PVC cable (i-30 VDC at 60 mA) ,+ -QPC578C 0$3500 feet ilO67 m) with 24 AWG PVC cable (i-30 VDC at 60 line rate line coding powe[...]